1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
70 \font_typewriter default
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -1966299584 "ef"
150 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 by the \SpecialChar LyX
166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
168 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
169 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
170 Documentation mailing list:
171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
173 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
203 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
211 \begin_layout Standard
212 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
213 LatexCommand tableofcontents
220 \begin_layout Chapter
224 \begin_layout Section
225 What is \SpecialChar LyX
229 \begin_layout Standard
231 is a document preparation system.
232 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
233 scripts, publishable books, business
234 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
235 It is unlike most other
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
243 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
245 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
261 pt type, left justified, 5
262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
275 \begin_layout Standard
276 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
281 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
285 \begin_layout Standard
290 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
291 's philosophy: most importantly,
292 the format of all of the manuals.
293 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
294 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
300 manual describes that, too.
303 \begin_layout Section
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
310 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
312 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
313 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
319 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
320 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
322 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
323 only a vertical scrollbar.
324 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
325 The first case is large images.
326 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
327 image and use the option
338 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
341 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
342 this doesn't work for equations yet.
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
347 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
355 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
362 \begin_layout Section
366 \begin_layout Standard
367 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
369 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
371 Just select the manual you want to read from the
378 \begin_layout Section
379 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
383 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
390 \begin_layout Standard
391 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
392 can be configured via the menu
394 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
398 \begin_inset Index idx
401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
408 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 packages are available.
412 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
414 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
416 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
421 \begin_inset space \space{}
424 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
427 To force \SpecialChar LyX
428 to re-inspect your system, you should use
430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
434 \begin_inset Index idx
437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
438 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
444 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
445 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
448 \begin_layout Section
451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
453 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
460 \begin_layout Standard
461 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
462 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
463 installed, but you will not be
464 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
465 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
466 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
467 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
468 document can always be output as plain text
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
474 or DocBook classes or packages.
475 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
476 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
479 \begin_layout Standard
480 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
482 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
485 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
505 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
508 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
512 \begin_inset Note Note
515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
516 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
517 Code box prevent that the term
518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
526 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
527 More about \SpecialChar TeX
528 Code is described in section
533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
535 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
539 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
540 is explained in section
545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
547 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
557 \begin_inset Index idx
560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
561 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
567 See section 5.1 of the
571 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
575 \begin_layout Chapter
576 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
580 \begin_layout Section
581 Basic File Operations
582 \begin_inset Index idx
585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
594 \begin_layout Standard
599 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
600 in addition to some more advanced operations:
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
641 arg "buffer-new-template"
647 \begin_layout Itemize
669 \begin_layout Itemize
679 \begin_layout Itemize
693 \begin_layout Itemize
715 \begin_layout Itemize
727 arg "buffer-write-as"
733 \begin_layout Itemize
747 \begin_layout Itemize
761 \begin_layout Standard
762 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
763 a few minor differences.
766 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
777 command lists the available templates.
778 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
779 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
780 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
788 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
795 \begin_layout Standard
796 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
828 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
829 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
830 is just that — a big, blank space.
838 \begin_layout Standard
859 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
864 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
867 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
885 will reload the document from disk.
886 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
887 and want to restore it to the last save.
896 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
897 them as your changes.
900 \begin_layout Section
901 Basic Editing Features
902 \begin_inset Index idx
905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
914 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
921 \begin_layout Standard
922 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
923 can perform cut and paste operations
924 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
925 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
926 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
927 editing features and how to access
929 We will start with cut and paste.
932 \begin_layout Standard
933 As you might expect, the
937 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
938 various other editing features.
939 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
943 \begin_layout Itemize
949 \begin_inset Index idx
952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
981 \begin_layout Itemize
987 \begin_inset Index idx
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1019 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset Index idx
1028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1053 \begin_layout Itemize
1057 \begin_inset space ~
1063 \begin_layout Itemize
1067 \begin_inset space ~
1073 \begin_layout Itemize
1077 \begin_inset space ~
1081 \begin_inset space ~
1087 \begin_inset Index idx
1090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1099 \begin_inset Index idx
1102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1117 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1127 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1133 \begin_layout Standard
1134 The first three are self-explanatory.
1135 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1136 and other programs by
1157 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1158 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1163 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1164 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1165 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1166 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1167 into individual cells.
1171 \begin_inset space ~
1176 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1177 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1181 \begin_layout Standard
1185 \begin_inset space ~
1190 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1192 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1207 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1208 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1209 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1215 \begin_inset space \space{}
1218 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1219 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1225 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 \begin_inset space ~
1231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1244 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1245 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1247 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1251 \begin_inset space ~
1256 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1257 start a new paragraph.
1258 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1259 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1264 \begin_inset space ~
1267 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1273 \begin_inset space ~
1281 \begin_inset space ~
1284 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1287 paste from the primary selection.
1288 This is normally the currently selected text.
1291 \begin_layout Standard
1294 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1296 \begin_inset space ~
1300 \begin_inset space ~
1308 \begin_inset space ~
1312 \begin_inset space ~
1318 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1324 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1327 \begin_inset space ~
1336 \begin_inset space ~
1341 button to skip the current word.
1345 \begin_inset space ~
1350 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1354 \begin_inset space ~
1359 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1361 If the toggle is set, searching for
1362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1373 will not match the word
1374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1388 Match whole words only
1390 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1391 to only find complete words, e.
1392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1421 offers also an advanced
1424 \begin_inset space ~
1428 \begin_inset space ~
1433 feature that is described in sec.
1434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1440 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1447 \begin_layout Standard
1448 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1449 \begin_inset space \space{}
1453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1461 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1463 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1468 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1475 \begin_layout Standard
1479 arg "inset-select-all"
1482 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1483 When the cursor is inside an inset
1486 arg "inset-select-all"
1489 selects the content of the inset.
1493 arg "inset-select-all"
1496 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1501 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1504 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1508 \begin_layout Section
1510 \begin_inset Index idx
1513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1520 \begin_inset Index idx
1523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1532 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1540 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1542 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1545 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1548 or the toolbar button
1554 to undo some mistake.
1555 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1557 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1560 or the toolbar button
1567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1574 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1578 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1581 \begin_layout Standard
1582 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1591 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1592 This is a consequence of the 100
1593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1596 step undo limit mentioned above.
1599 \begin_layout Standard
1608 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1610 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1614 \begin_layout Section
1616 \begin_inset Index idx
1619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1628 \begin_layout Standard
1629 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1632 \begin_layout Enumerate
1634 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1641 \begin_layout Itemize
1646 once anywhere in the edit window.
1647 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1651 \begin_layout Enumerate
1653 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1660 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1670 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1673 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1674 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1677 \begin_layout Itemize
1678 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1681 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1688 \begin_layout Enumerate
1689 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1690 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1697 \begin_layout Standard
1698 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1699 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1703 \begin_layout Section
1705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1707 name "sec:Navigating"
1712 \begin_inset Index idx
1715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1724 \begin_layout Standard
1726 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1729 \begin_layout Itemize
1734 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1735 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1738 \begin_layout Itemize
1739 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1741 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1743 \begin_inset space ~
1748 or by the toolbar button
1751 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1757 \begin_layout Itemize
1758 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1760 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1763 and use the same menu to return to them.
1764 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1771 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1776 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1777 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1779 \begin_inset space ~
1784 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1785 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1786 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1787 your last editing position.
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1795 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1799 \begin_layout Subsection
1801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1803 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1810 \begin_layout Standard
1811 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1812 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1813 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1821 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1825 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1832 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1837 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1841 \begin_layout Standard
1842 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1843 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1844 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1845 dialog and to modify the citation.
1848 \begin_layout Standard
1849 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1851 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1852 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1860 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1863 \begin_layout Standard
1864 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1865 you further to control the display.
1870 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1871 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1877 option keeps it in the current view state.
1878 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1879 \begin_inset space ~
1882 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1883 \begin_inset space ~
1886 3, the subsections of sections
1887 \begin_inset space ~
1890 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1895 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1896 \begin_inset space ~
1900 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1910 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1913 \begin_layout Standard
1920 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1921 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1935 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1936 So, for example, you can move section
1937 \begin_inset space ~
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1944 2.4 or after section
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1950 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1963 (or the corresponding key bindings
1971 ) you can change the level of sections.
1972 So you can for example make section
1973 \begin_inset space ~
1977 \begin_inset space ~
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1987 \begin_layout Section
1988 Input/Word Completion
1989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1991 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1996 \begin_inset Index idx
1999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2006 \begin_inset Index idx
2009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2040 \begin_layout Standard
2042 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2044 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2045 is used to propose completions.
2048 \begin_layout Standard
2049 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2052 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2057 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2064 \begin_inset space ~
2068 \begin_inset space ~
2073 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2077 \begin_inset space ~
2082 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2083 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2087 \begin_inset space ~
2093 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2094 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2095 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2096 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2099 \begin_layout Standard
2101 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2102 completions available.
2107 key to accept a proposed completion.
2108 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2109 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2110 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2117 \begin_layout Standard
2118 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2119 ing options for text.
2120 The special math option
2124 enables characters to be composed.
2125 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2126 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2129 , you can then input the characters
2130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2141 to a formula to get it.
2142 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2143 of the math toolbar.
2144 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2148 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2149 's installation folder.
2150 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2159 \begin_layout Section
2161 \begin_inset Index idx
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2171 \begin_inset Index idx
2174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2203 \begin_inset Index idx
2206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2238 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2252 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2255 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2259 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2266 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2273 \begin_layout Standard
2277 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset space ~
2306 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2310 \begin_layout Labeling
2311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2315 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2316 LatexCommand nomenclature
2318 description "Tabulator key"
2324 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2326 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2327 \begin_inset space ~
2331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2333 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2340 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2344 , especially section
2345 \begin_inset space ~
2349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2351 reference "subsec:Lists"
2357 If you are still confused, look in the
2362 \begin_inset Newline newline
2370 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2371 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2375 \begin_layout Labeling
2376 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2380 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2381 LatexCommand nomenclature
2383 description "Escape key"
2390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2397 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2398 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2401 \begin_layout Labeling
2402 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2408 \begin_inset space ~
2412 \begin_inset space ~
2419 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2420 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2424 \begin_layout Standard
2425 There are three modifier keys:
2428 \begin_layout Labeling
2429 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2447 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2448 LatexCommand nomenclature
2450 description "Control key"
2454 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2455 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2456 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2463 \begin_layout Itemize
2472 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2475 \begin_layout Itemize
2484 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2487 \begin_layout Itemize
2496 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2500 \begin_layout Labeling
2501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2519 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2520 LatexCommand nomenclature
2522 description "Shift key"
2526 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2527 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2530 \begin_layout Labeling
2531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2549 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2550 LatexCommand nomenclature
2552 description "Alt or Meta key"
2556 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2557 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2558 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2564 \begin_inset Newline newline
2567 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2569 menu accelerator keys
2572 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2573 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2574 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2581 \begin_layout Standard
2582 For example, the sequence
2583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2589 \begin_inset space ~
2593 \begin_inset space ~
2599 \begin_inset space ~
2607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2626 \begin_inset space ~
2632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2642 \begin_layout Standard
2647 manual lists all other things bound to the
2655 \begin_layout Standard
2656 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2658 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2659 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2660 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2661 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2662 The \SpecialChar LyX
2663 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2664 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2665 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2667 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2683 followed by a capital
2690 \begin_layout Chapter
2693 \begin_inset Index idx
2696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2706 \begin_layout Section
2708 \begin_inset Index idx
2711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2720 \begin_layout Subsection
2724 \begin_layout Standard
2725 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2726 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2727 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2728 numbering schemes, and so on.
2729 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2730 and format the title of your document differently.
2733 \begin_layout Standard
2738 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2739 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2740 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2741 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2742 picks one for you by default.
2743 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2746 \begin_layout Subsection
2748 \begin_inset Index idx
2751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2760 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2767 \begin_layout Standard
2768 You can select a class using the
2770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2771 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2775 \begin_inset Index idx
2778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2785 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2794 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2799 \begin_layout Description
2800 Article for basic articles
2803 \begin_layout Description
2804 Report for basic reports
2807 \begin_layout Description
2808 Book for writing a book
2811 \begin_layout Description
2812 Letter for US-style letters
2815 \begin_layout Standard
2816 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2817 only uses if you have installed
2818 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2819 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2820 distributions will include
2822 Here are some of the classes.
2823 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2825 Special Document Classes
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2838 \begin_layout Description
2839 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2843 \begin_layout Description
2844 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2848 \begin_layout Description
2849 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2850 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2851 There are three article layouts available.
2852 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2853 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2854 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2855 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2860 sequential numbering
2861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2864 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2865 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2866 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2867 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2870 \begin_layout Description
2871 Beamer Layout for presentations
2874 \begin_layout Description
2875 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2876 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2877 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2878 with \SpecialChar LyX
2882 \begin_layout Description
2883 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2886 \begin_layout Description
2888 \begin_inset space ~
2891 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2894 \begin_layout Description
2895 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2898 \begin_layout Description
2899 Foils Used to make transparencies
2902 \begin_layout Description
2903 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2904 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2905 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2906 with \SpecialChar LyX
2910 \begin_layout Description
2911 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2912 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2915 \begin_layout Description
2916 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2919 \begin_layout Description
2920 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2925 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2926 (Is used by this document.)
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2933 \begin_layout Description
2934 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2937 \begin_layout Description
2942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2949 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2950 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2952 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2956 \begin_layout Description
2957 Slides Used to make transparencies
2960 \begin_layout Description
2962 \begin_inset space ~
2965 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2966 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2969 \begin_layout Description
2970 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2973 \begin_layout Standard
2974 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2976 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2982 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2983 of the document classes.
2986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2990 \begin_layout Standard
2991 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2994 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2996 \begin_inset Index idx
2999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3016 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3017 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3019 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3022 \begin_layout Standard
3025 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3030 , are highly specialized.
3032 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3033 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3034 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3035 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3036 by some document class.
3037 There are just too many of them.
3038 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3041 \begin_layout Standard
3042 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3050 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3051 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3052 document class for a new file.
3054 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3059 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3068 manual for information on how to install them.
3069 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3075 \begin_layout Standard
3076 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3077 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3078 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3079 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3080 class files to be used for dissertation
3081 s submitted to those universities.
3082 The \SpecialChar LyX
3083 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3085 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3089 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3095 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3102 name "subsec:Modules"
3107 \begin_inset Index idx
3110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3119 \begin_layout Standard
3120 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3121 chosen document class.
3122 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3123 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3134 \begin_inset Index idx
3137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3144 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3148 \begin_layout Standard
3149 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3150 packages or file format converters that are not always
3151 installed by default.
3153 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3154 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3155 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3156 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3158 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3159 file without the missing prerequisites.
3160 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3161 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3164 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3168 \begin_inset Index idx
3171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3172 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3182 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3191 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3194 \begin_layout Standard
3195 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3203 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3205 will advise you about these things.
3213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3217 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3222 \begin_inset Index idx
3225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3226 Document ! Local Layout
3234 \begin_layout Standard
3235 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3236 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3237 : They are intended to be used in
3238 a variety of different documents.
3239 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3240 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3241 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3242 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3243 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3245 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3263 manual for information on how to use it.
3266 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3270 \begin_layout Standard
3271 Each class has a default set of options.
3272 Here's a quick table describing them:
3275 \begin_layout Standard
3276 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3282 \begin_layout Standard
3284 \begin_inset Tabular
3285 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3286 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3287 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3288 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3289 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3290 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3291 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3745 \begin_layout Standard
3746 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3752 \begin_layout Standard
3753 You're probably also wondering what
3754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3758 \begin_inset space ~
3762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3766 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3767 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3772 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3777 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3787 headings, there are also
3795 headings, and so on.
3796 We will describe these headings fully in section
3797 \begin_inset space ~
3801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3803 reference "subsec:Headings"
3810 \begin_layout Subsection
3812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3814 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3819 \begin_inset Index idx
3822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3829 \begin_inset Index idx
3832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 \begin_layout Standard
3842 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3844 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3851 \begin_inset space ~
3859 \begin_inset space ~
3864 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3866 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3867 doesn't support special options you want to
3868 use for your document.
3869 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3870 -class and its options, you have to read
3874 \begin_layout Standard
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3891 \begin_inset space ~
3896 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3897 You can choose between the following five options:
3900 \begin_layout Labeling
3901 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3906 Use default page style of current class.
3909 \begin_layout Labeling
3910 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3915 No page numbers or headings.
3918 \begin_layout Labeling
3919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3927 \begin_layout Labeling
3928 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3933 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3934 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3935 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3936 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3939 \begin_layout Labeling
3940 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3945 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3946 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3952 \begin_inset Index idx
3955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3957 -packages ! fancyhdr
3963 How they are defined is explained in section
3964 \begin_inset space ~
3968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3970 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3977 \begin_layout Standard
3978 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3985 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3992 \begin_layout Subsection
3993 Paper Size and Orientation
3994 \begin_inset Index idx
3997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3998 Document ! Paper size
4004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4006 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4013 \begin_layout Standard
4014 You can find the following options in the menu
4017 \begin_inset space ~
4024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4028 \begin_inset Index idx
4031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4040 \begin_layout Labeling
4041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4045 \begin_inset space ~
4050 What size paper to print on.
4052 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
4059 \begin_layout Itemize
4065 \begin_layout Itemize
4071 \begin_layout Itemize
4077 \begin_layout Itemize
4083 \begin_layout Itemize
4086 US letter, US legal, US executive
4089 \begin_layout Itemize
4095 \begin_layout Itemize
4102 \begin_layout Labeling
4103 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4108 To choose whether to output as
4119 \begin_layout Labeling
4120 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4124 \begin_inset space ~
4129 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4130 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4133 \begin_layout Subsection
4135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4137 name "subsec:Margins"
4142 \begin_inset Index idx
4145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4152 \begin_inset Index idx
4155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4164 \begin_layout Standard
4165 Paper margins are set in the menu
4167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4171 \begin_inset Index idx
4174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4183 \begin_layout Standard
4184 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4185 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4186 the paper format and the font size into account.
4189 \begin_layout Subsection
4193 \begin_layout Standard
4194 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4200 That includes the paragraph environments.
4201 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4202 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4203 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4205 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4214 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4216 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4217 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4218 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4221 \begin_layout Section
4222 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4223 \begin_inset Index idx
4226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4227 Paragraph ! Indentation
4235 \begin_layout Subsection
4237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4239 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4246 \begin_layout Standard
4247 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4248 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4251 \begin_layout Standard
4252 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4253 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4254 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4255 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4259 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4265 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4266 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4267 language than English.
4269 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4272 \begin_layout Standard
4273 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4274 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4275 into \SpecialChar LyX
4277 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4280 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4282 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4283 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4284 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4291 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4292 goes to produce a printable file.
4297 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4299 gives you the ability globally to change
4303 these pre-coded spacings.
4304 We will explain more later.
4307 \begin_layout Subsection
4308 Paragraph Separation
4309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4311 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4316 \begin_inset Index idx
4319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4320 Paragraph ! Separation
4328 \begin_layout Standard
4336 \begin_inset space ~
4344 \begin_inset space ~
4351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4364 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4367 \begin_layout Subsection
4371 \begin_layout Standard
4372 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4377 \begin_inset space ~
4382 dialog and toggle the
4385 \begin_inset space ~
4390 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4393 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4397 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4398 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4402 \begin_layout Standard
4403 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4404 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4407 \begin_layout Subsection
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4413 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4428 \begin_inset Index idx
4431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4440 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4444 \begin_inset space ~
4453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4454 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4460 \begin_inset Index idx
4463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4465 -packages ! setspace
4470 installed to use this feature.
4475 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset space ~
4484 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4485 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4488 \begin_layout Section
4489 Paragraph Environments
4490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4492 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4497 \begin_inset Index idx
4500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4501 Paragraph ! Environments
4507 \begin_inset Index idx
4510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4511 Paragraph environments|(
4519 \begin_layout Subsection
4523 \begin_layout Standard
4524 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4527 \begin_layout Standard
4546 \begin_inset Newline newline
4549 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4551 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4552 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4553 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4562 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4565 \begin_layout Standard
4566 A paragraph environment is simply a
4567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4574 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4575 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4576 scheme, labels, and so on.
4577 Additionally, you can
4578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4585 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4586 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4587 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4588 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4590 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4592 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4595 \begin_layout Standard
4596 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4597 \begin_inset Graphics
4598 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4604 at the left end of the toolbar.
4606 will change the environment of the
4610 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4611 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4612 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4616 \begin_layout Standard
4625 create a new paragraph using the
4629 paragraph environment.
4631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4638 because if you are in one of these environments:
4641 \begin_layout Itemize
4647 \begin_layout Itemize
4653 \begin_layout Itemize
4659 \begin_layout Itemize
4665 \begin_layout Itemize
4671 \begin_layout Itemize
4677 \begin_layout Itemize
4683 \begin_layout Standard
4685 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4689 , rather than resetting it to
4694 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4695 \begin_inset space ~
4699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4701 reference "sec:Nesting"
4708 \begin_layout Subsection
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 The default paragraph environment is
4718 It creates a plain paragraph.
4720 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4721 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4722 this manual) are in the
4729 \begin_layout Standard
4730 You can nest a paragraph using the
4734 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4742 \begin_layout Subsection
4744 \begin_inset Index idx
4747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4756 \begin_layout Standard
4757 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4758 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4767 for thanks or contact information.
4768 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4769 places all of this on a separate page
4770 along with today's date.
4771 For other types of documents, the title
4772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4779 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4785 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4799 Here's how you use them:
4802 \begin_layout Itemize
4803 Put the title of your document in the
4810 \begin_layout Itemize
4811 Put the author name in the
4818 \begin_layout Itemize
4819 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4820 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4826 Note that using this environment is optional.
4827 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4828 will automatically insert today's date.
4829 If you don't want a date, use the option
4831 Suppress default date on front page
4835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4836 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4838 \begin_inset space ~
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can use footnotes to insert
4848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4855 or contact information.
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4872 name "subsec:Headings"
4879 \begin_layout Standard
4880 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4882 takes care of the numbering for you.
4885 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4887 \begin_inset Index idx
4890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4891 Section headings ! Numbered
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4900 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4904 \begin_layout Enumerate
4910 \begin_layout Enumerate
4916 \begin_layout Enumerate
4922 \begin_layout Enumerate
4928 \begin_layout Enumerate
4934 \begin_layout Enumerate
4940 \begin_layout Enumerate
4946 \begin_layout Standard
4948 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4949 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4950 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4953 \begin_layout Standard
4954 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4955 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4956 You group the book into chapters.
4958 does a similar grouping:
4961 \begin_layout Itemize
4966 is divided into either
4977 \begin_layout Itemize
4989 \begin_layout Itemize
5001 \begin_layout Itemize
5013 \begin_layout Itemize
5025 \begin_layout Itemize
5037 \begin_layout Standard
5038 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5046 Not all document types use the
5050 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5055 is the top-level heading.
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5068 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5069 labels it with its number,
5070 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5072 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5084 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5086 \begin_inset Index idx
5089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5090 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5098 \begin_layout Standard
5099 The unnumbered section headings have a
5100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5107 at the end of their name.
5108 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5109 the table of contents, see section
5110 \begin_inset space ~
5114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5124 Changing the Numbering
5125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5127 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5134 \begin_layout Standard
5135 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5136 in the Table of Contents.
5137 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5139 Just as certain classes start with
5153 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5163 This is something you can change.
5166 \begin_layout Standard
5169 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5173 \begin_inset Index idx
5176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 \begin_inset space ~
5189 \begin_inset space ~
5194 you will see two counters.
5199 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5200 numbers a section heading.
5201 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5205 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5206 Short Titles of Headings
5207 \begin_inset Index idx
5210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5211 Section headings ! Short titles
5217 \begin_inset Argument 1
5220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5229 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5236 \begin_layout Standard
5237 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5238 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5239 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5240 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5243 \begin_layout Standard
5245 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5246 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5247 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5248 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5253 \begin_inset space ~
5259 This will insert a box labeled
5260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5264 \begin_inset space ~
5268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5271 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5272 This also works for captions inside floats.
5273 There can only be one short title per title.
5276 \begin_layout Standard
5277 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5280 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5284 \begin_layout Standard
5285 The following information applies to all section headings:
5288 \begin_layout Itemize
5289 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5292 \begin_layout Itemize
5293 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5296 \begin_layout Itemize
5297 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5300 \begin_layout Itemize
5301 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5304 \begin_layout Subsection
5308 \begin_layout Standard
5310 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5324 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5325 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5326 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5327 the text they contain.
5328 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5336 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5339 \begin_layout Standard
5340 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5349 when you start a new paragraph.
5350 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5354 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5355 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5356 have to change back to the
5360 environment yourself.
5363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5372 \begin_inset Index idx
5375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5384 \begin_layout Standard
5385 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5386 time for the differences.
5395 are identical except for one difference:
5399 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5408 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5411 \begin_layout Standard
5412 Here's an example of the
5425 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5427 See – no indentation!
5431 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5432 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5433 the other paragraph.
5436 \begin_layout Standard
5437 Here's another example, this time in the
5444 \begin_layout Quotation
5450 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5451 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5452 the first line, then
5456 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5460 you were quoting other text.
5463 \begin_layout Quotation
5464 Here's a new paragraph.
5465 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5466 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5469 \begin_layout Standard
5470 As the examples show,
5474 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5475 They should put quotes in the
5480 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5484 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5499 \begin_inset Index idx
5502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5518 \begin_layout Standard
5523 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5529 \begin_inset Newline newline
5532 Which I did not rehearse!
5536 It could be much worse.
5537 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5539 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5540 indented a bit more than the first.
5541 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5547 \begin_inset Newline newline
5550 And make things look fine
5551 \begin_inset Newline newline
5557 arg "newline-insert newline"
5563 \begin_layout Standard
5568 does not indent both margins.
5569 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5570 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5573 arg "newline-insert newline"
5579 \begin_layout Subsection
5581 \begin_inset Index idx
5584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5600 \begin_layout Standard
5602 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5612 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5613 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5622 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5623 lets you provide your own label.
5624 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5625 describing some general features of all four of them.
5628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5632 \begin_layout Standard
5633 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5635 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5636 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5645 reset the environment to
5649 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5650 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5651 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5655 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5659 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5666 \begin_layout Standard
5667 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5668 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5669 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5671 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5672 you read all of section
5673 \begin_inset space ~
5677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5679 reference "sec:Nesting"
5686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5688 \begin_inset Index idx
5691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5707 \begin_layout Standard
5708 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5712 paragraph environment.
5713 It has the following properties:
5716 \begin_layout Itemize
5717 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5718 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5725 \begin_layout Itemize
5727 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5730 \begin_layout Itemize
5731 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5735 \begin_layout Itemize
5736 The items can have any length.
5738 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5739 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5746 \begin_layout Itemize
5751 environment inside another
5755 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5756 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5763 \begin_layout Itemize
5764 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5767 \begin_layout Itemize
5769 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5772 \begin_layout Itemize
5774 \begin_inset space ~
5778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5780 reference "sec:Nesting"
5784 for a full explanation of nesting.
5788 \begin_layout Standard
5789 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5798 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5801 \begin_layout Standard
5802 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5803 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5806 \begin_layout Itemize
5807 The label for the first level
5811 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5812 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5819 \begin_layout Itemize
5820 The label for the second level is a dash.
5821 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5828 \begin_layout Itemize
5829 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5830 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5838 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 Back out to the third level.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 Back to the second level.
5852 \begin_layout Itemize
5853 Back to the outermost level.
5856 \begin_layout Standard
5857 These are the default labels for an
5862 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5867 dialog in the submenu
5872 \begin_inset Index idx
5875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5881 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5885 \begin_layout Standard
5886 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5887 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5889 \begin_inset space ~
5893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5895 reference "sec:Nesting"
5902 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5904 \begin_inset Index idx
5907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5916 name "sec:Enumerate"
5923 \begin_layout Standard
5928 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5929 It has these properties:
5932 \begin_layout Enumerate
5933 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5934 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5941 \begin_layout Enumerate
5942 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5946 \begin_layout Enumerate
5948 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5951 \begin_layout Enumerate
5956 environment resets the counter to one.
5959 \begin_layout Enumerate
5969 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5976 \begin_layout Enumerate
5977 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5978 Items can have any length.
5981 \begin_layout Enumerate
5982 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5985 \begin_layout Enumerate
5986 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5989 \begin_layout Enumerate
5990 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5994 \begin_layout Standard
6003 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6005 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6006 labels the four different levels in an
6013 \begin_layout Enumerate
6014 The first level of an
6018 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6019 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6026 \begin_layout Enumerate
6027 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6028 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6035 \begin_layout Enumerate
6036 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6037 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6045 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6048 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6054 \begin_layout Enumerate
6055 Back to the third level
6059 \begin_layout Enumerate
6060 Back to the second level.
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Back to the outermost level.
6068 \begin_layout Standard
6069 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6073 environment, see section
6074 \begin_inset space ~
6078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6080 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6085 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6090 There is more to nesting
6094 environments than we've stated here.
6095 You should read section
6096 \begin_inset space ~
6100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6102 reference "sec:Nesting"
6106 to learn more about nesting.
6109 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6111 \begin_inset Index idx
6114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6123 \begin_layout Standard
6124 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6128 list has no fixed label.
6129 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6138 of the first line as the label.
6142 \begin_layout Description
6143 Example: This is an example of the
6150 \begin_layout Standard
6152 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6156 \begin_layout Standard
6158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6165 it is meant that the first usage of the
6169 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6171 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6179 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6185 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6187 \begin_inset space ~
6193 \begin_inset space ~
6197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6199 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6203 for more information.) Here is an example:
6206 \begin_layout Description
6208 \begin_inset space ~
6211 Example: This one shows how to use a
6214 \begin_inset space ~
6226 \begin_layout Description
6227 Usage: You should use the
6231 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6232 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6234 It's not a good idea to use a
6238 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6239 You're better off using
6251 paragraphs into them.
6254 \begin_layout Description
6255 Nesting: You can nest
6259 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6263 \begin_layout Standard
6264 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6265 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6266 them from the first line.
6269 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6271 \begin_inset Index idx
6274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6283 \begin_layout Standard
6288 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6289 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6293 \begin_layout Standard
6302 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6304 Here are its properties:
6307 \begin_layout Labeling
6308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6310 \begin_inset space ~
6313 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6322 of each line as the item label.
6327 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6328 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6329 space as described above.
6332 \begin_layout Labeling
6333 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6334 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6335 uses different margins for the item label and the
6336 body of the item text.
6337 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6338 label width plus a little extra space.
6342 \begin_layout Labeling
6343 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6345 \begin_inset space ~
6348 width \SpecialChar LyX
6349 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6350 If the label width is larger, the label
6351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6358 into the first line.
6359 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6360 margin of the rest of the item text.
6363 \begin_layout Labeling
6364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6366 \begin_inset space ~
6369 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6374 environment has the same left margin.
6375 \begin_inset Newline newline
6378 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6381 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6383 \begin_inset space ~
6388 dialog (toolbar button
6391 arg "layout-paragraph"
6398 \begin_inset space ~
6403 determines the default label width.
6404 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6413 multiple times instead.
6414 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6424 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6427 \begin_inset space ~
6432 every time you alter a label in a
6437 \begin_inset Newline newline
6440 The predefined default width is the length of
6441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6449 \begin_inset space ~
6455 \begin_layout Standard
6460 list the same way as the
6464 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6470 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6474 \begin_layout Standard
6479 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6480 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6482 \begin_inset space ~
6486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6488 reference "sec:Nesting"
6492 to learn about nesting.
6495 \begin_layout Standard
6496 There is yet another feature of the
6500 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6501 left-justifies the item labels by
6503 You can use additional
6507 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6508 justifies the item label.
6513 are documented in section
6514 \begin_inset space ~
6518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6520 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6525 Here are some examples:
6528 \begin_layout Labeling
6529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6530 Left The default for
6537 \begin_layout Labeling
6538 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6539 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6546 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6549 \begin_layout Labeling
6550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6551 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6555 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6562 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6565 \begin_layout Subsection
6567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6569 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6574 \begin_inset Index idx
6577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6586 \begin_layout Standard
6587 The features described in this section require that the module
6589 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6591 is loaded in the document settings.
6592 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6598 \begin_inset Index idx
6601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6603 -packages ! enumitem
6611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6612 Custom Enumerate Lists
6613 \begin_inset Index idx
6616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6617 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6625 \begin_layout Standard
6627 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6630 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6633 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6634 There you add the command
6637 \begin_layout Standard
6645 \begin_layout Standard
6657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6658 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6659 Code, look at section
6660 \begin_inset space ~
6664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6666 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6679 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6686 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6687 For capital Roman numerals replace
6699 in the command above.
6700 For Arabic numerals use
6708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6715 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6730 \begin_layout Standard
6732 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6740 You can only number 26
6741 \begin_inset space ~
6744 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6752 \begin_layout Standard
6753 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6754 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6757 \begin_layout Standard
6758 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6761 \begin_layout Enumerate
6762 \begin_inset Argument 1
6765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6788 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6795 \begin_layout Enumerate
6796 \begin_inset Argument 1
6799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6822 \begin_layout Enumerate
6824 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6831 \begin_layout Enumerate
6832 \begin_inset Argument 1
6835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6863 \begin_layout Enumerate
6864 \begin_inset Argument 1
6867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Standard
6894 For this list these commands were used:
6897 \begin_layout Standard
6908 \begin_inset Newline newline
6916 \begin_inset Newline newline
6924 \begin_inset Newline newline
6934 \begin_layout Standard
6941 makes the label emphasized and
6950 \begin_layout Standard
6951 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6959 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6960 lists until you change the definition.
6968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6970 \begin_inset Index idx
6973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6974 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6982 \begin_layout Standard
6983 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6986 \begin_layout Enumerate
6987 \begin_inset Argument 1
6990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7009 \begin_inset Note Note
7012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7013 goes back to default numbering
7021 \begin_layout Enumerate
7025 \begin_layout Standard
7029 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7033 \begin_layout Standard
7034 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7039 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7040 to indicate that it is a resumed
7041 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7042 , but in the output.
7045 \begin_layout Standard
7046 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7054 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7063 \begin_layout Standard
7064 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7066 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7067 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7068 of a normal enumeration.
7069 There, insert the command
7072 \begin_layout Standard
7078 \begin_layout Standard
7083 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7087 \begin_layout Enumerate
7091 \begin_layout Enumerate
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7099 \begin_layout Enumerate
7100 \begin_inset Argument 1
7103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 This enumeration starts at 4
7122 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7124 \begin_inset Index idx
7127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7137 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7139 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7142 \begin_layout Itemize
7146 \begin_layout Itemize
7147 with standard spacing
7150 \begin_layout Standard
7151 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7153 Add there the command
7157 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7160 \begin_layout Itemize
7161 \begin_inset Argument 1
7164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 \begin_layout Itemize
7187 \begin_layout Itemize
7191 \begin_layout Standard
7192 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7199 \begin_inset Index idx
7202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7204 -packages ! enumitem
7210 For more information see its documentation,
7211 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7220 \begin_layout Standard
7221 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7223 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7224 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7228 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7231 \begin_layout Enumerate
7232 \begin_inset Argument 1
7235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7243 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7256 \begin_layout Enumerate
7257 with negative indentation
7260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7261 Further Customization
7262 \begin_inset Index idx
7265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7266 Lists ! Customization
7274 \begin_layout Standard
7275 You can also change the style of description lists.
7279 \begin_layout Standard
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 changes the description label font, the command
7289 \begin_layout Standard
7295 \begin_layout Standard
7296 sets the list style.
7299 \begin_layout Standard
7300 An example where the command
7303 \begin_layout Standard
7308 itshape, style=nextline
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7315 \begin_layout Description
7317 \begin_inset space ~
7321 \begin_inset Argument 1
7324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7330 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7332 itshape, style=nextline
7342 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7343 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7347 \begin_layout Description
7349 \begin_inset space ~
7352 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7353 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7354 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7358 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7364 \begin_inset Index idx
7367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7369 -packages ! enumitem
7375 For more information see its documentation
7376 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7385 \begin_layout Subsection
7387 \begin_inset Index idx
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7401 \begin_inset space ~
7404 Address: An Overview
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7408 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7409 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7417 \begin_inset space ~
7423 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7424 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7425 gags on the document.
7426 In contrast, you can use the
7433 \begin_inset space ~
7438 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7439 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7443 \begin_layout Standard
7444 Of course, you're not limited to using
7451 \begin_inset space ~
7460 \begin_inset space ~
7465 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7466 some European academic papers.
7469 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7473 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7480 \begin_layout Standard
7485 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7486 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7490 \begin_inset space ~
7495 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7496 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7497 Here's an example of each:
7500 \begin_layout Right Address
7502 \begin_inset Newline newline
7506 \begin_inset Newline newline
7510 \begin_inset Newline newline
7513 When is it? What is today?
7516 \begin_layout Standard
7520 \begin_inset space ~
7526 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7528 the largest block of text on a single line.
7529 Here's an example of the
7536 \begin_layout Address
7538 \begin_inset Newline newline
7541 Where do I send this
7542 \begin_inset Newline newline
7545 Your post office and country
7548 \begin_layout Standard
7549 As you can see, both
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7566 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7567 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7573 This makes sense, since
7581 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7582 Thus, you have to use
7589 arg "newline-insert newline"
7594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7595 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7597 \begin_inset space ~
7601 \begin_inset space ~
7606 ) to start a new line in an
7613 \begin_inset space ~
7621 \begin_layout Subsection
7625 \begin_layout Standard
7626 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7627 or list of references.
7629 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7632 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7634 \begin_inset Index idx
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7646 \begin_layout Standard
7651 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7652 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7653 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7654 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7668 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7669 The book document classes ignores the
7673 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7677 in a letter document class.
7680 \begin_layout Standard
7685 environment does several things for you.
7686 First, it puts the centered label
7687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7695 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7697 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7698 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7699 the subsequent text.
7700 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7702 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7706 \begin_layout Standard
7707 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7711 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7712 The new paragraph will still be in the
7717 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7718 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7721 \begin_layout Standard
7722 \begin_inset Float figure
7727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7729 \begin_inset Graphics
7730 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7738 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7743 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7764 \begin_layout Standard
7765 We would love to demonstrate the
7769 environment, but since this document is in the
7770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7777 class, we can't do this.
7778 We inserted it therefore as figure
7779 \begin_inset space ~
7783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7785 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7790 If you have never heard of an
7791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7798 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7803 \begin_inset Index idx
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7815 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7822 \begin_layout Standard
7827 environment is used to list references.
7828 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7829 only use it at the end of the document.
7841 \begin_layout Standard
7842 When you first open a
7846 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7847 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7863 depending on the document class.
7864 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7865 Each paragraph of the
7869 environment is a bibliography entry.
7874 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7875 Each new paragraph is still in the
7882 \begin_layout Standard
7883 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7884 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7886 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7888 handling, have a look at section
7889 \begin_inset space ~
7893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7895 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7902 \begin_layout Subsection
7903 Special Environments
7906 \begin_layout Standard
7908 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7909 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7912 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7917 \begin_inset Index idx
7920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7930 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7937 \begin_layout Standard
7943 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7945 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7950 key as a fixed whitespace.
7954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7967 \begin_inset space ~
7972 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7986 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7989 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7992 arg "newline-insert newline"
8009 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8010 So, when you finish using the
8015 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8016 Also, you can nest the
8021 environment inside of others.
8024 \begin_layout Standard
8025 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8028 \begin_layout Itemize
8032 arg "newline-insert newline"
8035 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8040 \begin_inset space \space{}
8050 arg "newline-insert newline"
8056 \begin_layout Itemize
8060 arg "newline-insert newline"
8070 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8076 \begin_layout Itemize
8077 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8078 You must put at least one
8082 in any line you want blank.
8083 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8087 \begin_layout Itemize
8088 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8092 since that will insert
8097 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8100 arg "self-insert \""
8106 \begin_layout Standard
8110 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8114 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8118 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8122 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8126 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8127 printf("Hello World!
8132 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8136 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8140 \begin_layout Standard
8141 This is just the standard
8142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8153 \begin_layout Standard
8159 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8161 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8162 as if you used a typewriter.
8163 \begin_inset Index idx
8166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8167 Paragraph environments|)
8172 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8175 Program Code Listings
8180 \begin_inset space ~
8188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8192 \begin_inset Index idx
8195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8204 \begin_layout Standard
8209 environment is similar to the
8214 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8215 computer console text.
8220 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8234 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8235 you can have empty lines.
8248 \begin_layout Itemize
8249 have a certain language and a text style
8252 \begin_layout Itemize
8253 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8254 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8255 and \SpecialChar TeX
8259 \begin_layout Standard
8260 Because of these properties
8264 works like a typewriter.
8268 \begin_layout Verbatim
8272 \begin_layout Verbatim
8275 The following 2 lines are empty:
8278 \begin_layout Verbatim
8282 \begin_layout Verbatim
8286 \begin_layout Verbatim
8287 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8292 \begin_layout Section
8293 Nesting Environments
8294 \begin_inset Index idx
8297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8298 Nesting ! Environments
8304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8313 \begin_layout Subsection
8317 \begin_layout Standard
8319 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8321 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8323 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8325 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8337 \begin_layout Enumerate
8341 \begin_layout Enumerate
8343 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8350 \begin_layout Enumerate
8354 \begin_layout Enumerate
8359 \begin_layout Enumerate
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8364 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8365 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8367 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8369 \begin_inset space ~
8373 \begin_inset space ~
8381 \begin_inset space ~
8385 \begin_inset space ~
8390 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8392 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8395 arg "depth-increment"
8401 arg "depth-decrement"
8415 arg "depth-increment"
8421 arg "depth-decrement"
8425 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8426 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8430 \begin_layout Standard
8431 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8432 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8433 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8434 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8435 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8438 \begin_layout Standard
8439 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8441 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8443 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8446 \begin_layout Subsection
8447 What You Can and Can't Nest
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8451 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8452 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8455 \begin_layout Standard
8456 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8457 than a simple yes or no.
8458 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8461 \begin_layout Itemize
8462 Completely unnestable
8465 \begin_layout Itemize
8466 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8470 \begin_layout Itemize
8471 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8475 \begin_layout Standard
8476 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8477 environments have them:
8480 \begin_layout Description
8481 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8482 Can't nest into them.
8483 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8490 \begin_layout Itemize
8496 \begin_layout Itemize
8502 \begin_layout Itemize
8508 \begin_layout Itemize
8514 \begin_layout Itemize
8521 \begin_layout Description
8523 \begin_inset space ~
8526 Nestable You can nest them.
8527 You can nest other things into them.
8528 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 \begin_layout Itemize
8547 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 \begin_layout Itemize
8571 \begin_layout Itemize
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Description
8592 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8593 You can't nest anything into them.
8594 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8607 \begin_layout Itemize
8613 \begin_layout Itemize
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_inset space ~
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Standard
8697 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8705 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8715 \begin_inset space ~
8718 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8719 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8720 nested section headings violate this.
8728 \begin_layout Subsection
8729 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8730 \begin_inset Index idx
8733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8734 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8742 \begin_layout Standard
8743 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8744 affected by nesting anyhow.
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Itemize
8756 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Standard
8762 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8770 Figures and tables in
8774 are not affected by this.
8779 Have a look at section
8780 \begin_inset space ~
8784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8786 reference "sec:Floats"
8790 for more information about
8797 \begin_layout Standard
8799 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8800 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8804 \begin_layout Standard
8805 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8813 of its own, it behaves just like a
8814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8821 paragraph environment.
8822 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8826 \begin_layout Standard
8827 Here's an example with a table:
8830 \begin_layout Enumerate
8832 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8839 \begin_layout Enumerate
8840 This is (a) and it's nested.
8841 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8849 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8855 \begin_layout Standard
8857 \begin_inset Tabular
8858 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8859 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8945 \begin_layout Standard
8946 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8953 \begin_layout Enumerate
8955 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8959 \begin_layout Enumerate
8963 \begin_layout Standard
8964 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8967 \begin_layout Enumerate
8969 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8976 \begin_layout Enumerate
8977 This is (a) and it's nested.
8981 \begin_layout Standard
8982 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8988 \begin_layout Standard
8990 \begin_inset Tabular
8991 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8992 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8993 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8994 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9078 \begin_layout Standard
9079 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9085 \begin_layout Enumerate
9092 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9095 \begin_layout Enumerate
9099 \begin_layout Standard
9100 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9104 \begin_layout Standard
9105 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9108 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9111 \begin_layout Enumerate
9113 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9120 \begin_layout Enumerate
9121 This is (a) and it's nested.
9124 \begin_layout Standard
9125 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9131 \begin_layout Standard
9133 \begin_inset Tabular
9134 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9135 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9137 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9222 \begin_layout Standard
9223 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9229 \begin_layout Enumerate
9231 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9238 \begin_layout Enumerate
9242 \begin_layout Standard
9243 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9249 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9250 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9254 \begin_layout Subsection
9255 Usage and General Features
9258 \begin_layout Standard
9259 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9260 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9269 is the innermost possible depth.
9270 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9273 \begin_layout Enumerate
9274 level #1 – outermost
9275 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9282 \begin_layout Enumerate
9284 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9291 \begin_layout Enumerate
9293 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9300 \begin_layout Enumerate
9302 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9309 \begin_layout Itemize
9311 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9318 \begin_layout Itemize
9327 \begin_layout Standard
9328 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9329 both of them in the example.
9330 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9340 For example, if we tried to nest another
9345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9352 , we would get errors.
9355 \begin_layout Subsection
9357 \begin_inset Index idx
9360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9369 \begin_layout Standard
9370 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9371 We have several examples of nested environments.
9372 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9377 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9380 \begin_layout Labeling
9381 \labelwidthstring MMM
9382 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9388 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9395 \begin_layout Labeling
9396 \labelwidthstring MMM
9397 #2-a This is level #2.
9398 We created it by using
9401 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9407 arg "depth-increment"
9411 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9418 \begin_layout Labeling
9419 \labelwidthstring MMM
9420 #3-a This is level #3.
9421 This time, we just enter
9428 arg "depth-increment"
9432 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9436 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9442 arg "depth-increment"
9446 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9453 \begin_layout Standard
9458 environment, nested inside of
9459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9467 So, it's at level #4.
9468 We did this by entering
9471 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9477 arg "depth-increment"
9480 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9485 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9501 \begin_layout Standard
9506 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9509 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9515 \begin_layout Labeling
9516 \labelwidthstring MMM
9517 #4-a This is level #4.
9521 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9524 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9529 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9533 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9538 keep nesting things inside
9539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9547 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9554 \begin_layout Labeling
9555 \labelwidthstring MMM
9556 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9558 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9565 \begin_layout Labeling
9566 \labelwidthstring MMM
9567 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9568 and this is level #6.
9569 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9573 \begin_layout Labeling
9574 \labelwidthstring MMM
9575 #5-b Back to level #5.
9579 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9585 arg "depth-decrement"
9592 \begin_layout Labeling
9593 \labelwidthstring MMM
9597 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9603 arg "depth-decrement"
9606 , we're back at level #4.
9610 \begin_layout Labeling
9611 \labelwidthstring MMM
9612 #3-b Back to level #3.
9613 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9617 \begin_layout Labeling
9618 \labelwidthstring MMM
9619 #2-b Back to level #2.
9624 \begin_layout Labeling
9625 \labelwidthstring MMM
9626 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9627 After this sentence, we will enter
9631 and change the paragraph environment back to
9638 \begin_layout Standard
9639 We could have also used the
9655 environment in place of the
9660 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9664 Example 2: Inheritance
9667 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9668 This is the \SpecialChar LyX
9669 -Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9672 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9681 arg "depth-increment"
9685 \begin_inset Newline newline
9688 which, we will change to the
9693 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9700 \begin_layout Enumerate
9705 environment, at level #2.
9708 \begin_layout Enumerate
9709 Notice how the nested
9713 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9718 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9722 \begin_layout Standard
9723 We ended this example by entering
9728 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9732 and reset the nesting depth by using
9735 arg "depth-decrement"
9741 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9742 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9751 \begin_inset Argument 1
9754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9755 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9763 \begin_layout Enumerate
9764 This is level #1, in an
9768 paragraph environment.
9769 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9770 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9777 \begin_layout Enumerate
9782 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9788 arg "depth-increment"
9792 Now, what happens if we nest an
9796 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9797 label be? An asterisk?
9798 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9805 \begin_layout Itemize
9815 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9816 So, its label is a bullet.
9817 (We got here by using
9820 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9826 arg "depth-increment"
9829 , then changing the environment to
9834 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9841 \begin_layout Itemize
9842 Here's level #4, produced using
9845 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9851 arg "depth-increment"
9855 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9857 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9864 \begin_layout Enumerate
9867 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9872 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9876 , because we are in the
9884 environment (that is, it is an
9899 \begin_layout Enumerate
9904 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9905 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9909 \begin_layout Enumerate
9910 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9913 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9916 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9919 \begin_layout Enumerate
9923 arg "depth-decrement"
9926 to decrease the depth after the next
9929 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9936 \begin_layout Enumerate
9938 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9943 \begin_layout Enumerate
9945 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9946 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9951 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9960 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9965 reset the counter for the label.
9969 \begin_layout Enumerate
9973 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9979 arg "depth-decrement"
9982 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9983 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9984 into the twofold-nested
9992 \begin_layout Enumerate
9993 The same thing happens if we do another
9996 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10002 arg "depth-decrement"
10005 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10008 \begin_layout Standard
10009 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10014 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10025 The number of other
10029 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10036 The same rule applies for the
10040 environment, as well.
10043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10044 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10047 \begin_layout Enumerate
10048 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10049 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10050 the same detail with how we did it.
10056 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10063 \begin_layout Standard
10071 arg "depth-increment"
10078 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10079 the example in parentheses someplace.
10080 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10081 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10082 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10086 \begin_layout Enumerate
10091 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10092 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10099 \begin_layout Verse
10100 Now we will add verse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 It will get much worse.
10105 \begin_inset Newline newline
10115 arg "depth-increment"
10125 \begin_layout Verse
10126 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10130 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10131 \begin_inset Newline newline
10137 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10145 \begin_layout Verse
10146 Here comes a table:
10147 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10154 \begin_layout Standard
10155 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10161 \begin_layout Standard
10163 \begin_inset Tabular
10164 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10165 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10166 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10167 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10252 \begin_layout Verse
10256 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10266 arg "depth-increment"
10272 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10278 \begin_inset Newline newline
10286 arg "depth-decrement"
10293 \begin_layout Enumerate
10298 : level #1) This is another item.
10299 Note that selecting a
10303 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10304 3 times to put the table inside the
10312 \begin_layout Quotation
10313 We're now ending the
10317 list and changing to
10322 We're still at level #1.
10323 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10324 The next set of paragraphs is a
10325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10332 We will nest both the
10339 \begin_inset space ~
10344 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10348 for the letter body.
10352 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10355 to preserve the depth.
10356 Remember that you need to use
10359 arg "newline-insert newline"
10362 to create multiple lines inside the
10369 \begin_inset space ~
10376 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10383 \begin_layout Right Address
10385 \begin_inset Newline newline
10388 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10389 \begin_inset Newline newline
10395 \begin_layout Address
10397 \begin_inset space ~
10403 \begin_layout Quotation
10404 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10408 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10409 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10410 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10411 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10412 as soon as possible.
10413 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10416 \begin_layout Quotation
10417 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10418 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10419 with your order, along with payment.
10422 \begin_layout Quotation
10423 We thank you again for your patience.
10426 \begin_layout Address
10428 \begin_inset Newline newline
10435 \begin_layout Quotation
10436 That ends that example!
10439 \begin_layout Standard
10440 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10441 gives you a lot of power with just
10443 We could have easily nested an
10464 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10467 \begin_layout Subsection
10469 \begin_inset Index idx
10472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10473 Nesting ! Separation
10479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10481 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10488 \begin_layout Standard
10489 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10491 For example you need two different enumerations:
10494 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10512 \begin_layout Enumerate
10516 \begin_layout Standard
10517 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10523 \begin_layout Itemize
10529 \begin_layout Standard
10530 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10536 \begin_layout Enumerate
10540 \begin_layout Enumerate
10544 \begin_layout Enumerate
10548 \begin_layout Standard
10549 To tell \SpecialChar LyX
10550 that there are two lists and not one, set the cursor at the end
10551 of the last item and use the menu
10553 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10554 Start New Parent Environment
10557 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10558 If you use instead the menu
10560 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10561 Start New Environment
10563 a new list will also be created, but in the same nesting level.
10566 \begin_layout Standard
10567 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10569 \change_deleted -1966299584 1432227810
10571 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432227815
10577 arg "paragraph-break"
10581 \change_deleted -1966299584 1432227824
10586 in the pull-down box for environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10588 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432229616
10589 until you get an environment separator in the form of a small angled arrow.
10590 The only difference between this separator and the one you obtain by using
10591 the menu (a reddish line) is that it will also insert a blank line in the
10597 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432230601
10598 However, each kind of separator can be turned into the other kind by right-clic
10599 king it and choosing the wanted type through the context menu that opens.
10600 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10603 arg "paragraph-break"
10606 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10607 Thus, in a normal workflow, you can insert two consecutive environments
10608 of the same type by simply pressing
10611 arg "paragraph-break"
10614 until you get an environment separator, after which any other kind of environme
10615 nt can be inserted (even of the same type).
10618 \begin_layout Standard
10620 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432231566
10621 If you load documents produced with a previous version of \SpecialChar LyX
10623 that the angled-arrow separator may appear at the end of a line.
10624 In this case it is not used to separate environments but rather to assure
10625 that the same \SpecialChar LaTeX
10626 output is obtained.
10627 Indeed, previous versions of \SpecialChar LyX
10628 could insert spurious blank lines in the
10630 output, which are now avoided.
10631 As those blank lines may affect vertical spacing, \SpecialChar LyX
10632 takes care that you
10633 obtain the same results as before.
10634 You can safely remove the separators automatically inserted for this purpose
10635 if you like better the resulting vertical spacing.
10640 \begin_layout Section
10641 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10642 \begin_inset Index idx
10645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10654 \begin_layout Standard
10655 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10656 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10658 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10659 be broken at the end of a line.
10660 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10664 \begin_layout Subsection
10666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10668 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10673 \begin_inset Index idx
10676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10685 \begin_layout Standard
10686 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10687 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10688 ) not to break the line at
10690 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10693 \begin_layout Quote
10694 Further documentation is given in section
10695 \begin_inset Newline newline
10699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10701 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10709 \begin_layout Standard
10710 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10725 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10734 A protected space is set with
10736 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10737 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10739 \begin_inset space ~
10747 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10753 \begin_layout Subsection
10755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10757 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10762 \begin_inset Index idx
10765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10766 Spacing ! Horizontal
10774 \begin_layout Standard
10775 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10778 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10782 The length units are listed in Appendix
10783 \begin_inset space ~
10787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10789 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10800 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10805 \begin_inset Index idx
10808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10809 Spaces ! Inter-word
10817 \begin_layout Standard
10818 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10819 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10820 at the ends of sentences.
10821 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10822 automatically takes care about this.
10823 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10824 followed by a period; see section
10825 \begin_inset space ~
10829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10831 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10836 To insert a normal space, select
10838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10839 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10841 \begin_inset space ~
10849 arg "space-insert normal"
10855 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10859 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10864 \begin_inset Index idx
10867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10876 \begin_layout Standard
10878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10885 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10894 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10895 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10896 inside abbreviations:
10899 \begin_layout Quote
10901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10905 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10908 \begin_layout Standard
10909 or between values and units.
10910 Compare for example this:
10911 \begin_inset Newline newline
10915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10919 \begin_inset Newline newline
10922 10 kg (normal space
10925 \begin_layout Standard
10926 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10929 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10931 \begin_inset space ~
10939 arg "space-insert thin"
10945 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10949 \begin_layout Standard
10950 You can also insert the following space types:
10953 \begin_layout Description
10955 \begin_inset space ~
10959 \begin_inset space ~
10962 space A line with a
10963 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10967 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10971 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10974 negative thin space between the arrows.
10977 \begin_layout Description
10979 \begin_inset space ~
10983 \begin_inset space ~
10986 space A line with a
10987 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10991 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10998 negative medium space between the arrows.
11001 \begin_layout Description
11003 \begin_inset space ~
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11010 space A line with a
11011 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11015 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11019 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11022 negative thick space between the arrows.
11025 \begin_layout Description
11027 \begin_inset space ~
11031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11039 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11047 \begin_inset space ~
11051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11054 em) space between the arrows.
11057 \begin_layout Description
11059 \begin_inset space ~
11063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11067 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11071 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11075 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11079 \begin_inset space ~
11083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11086 em) space between the arrows.
11089 \begin_layout Description
11091 \begin_inset space ~
11095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11099 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11103 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11107 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11111 \begin_inset space ~
11115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11118 em) space between the arrows.
11121 \begin_layout Description
11123 \begin_inset space ~
11127 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11131 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11136 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11143 cm space between the arrows.
11146 \begin_layout Standard
11148 \begin_inset space ~
11152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11154 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11158 lists the different space sizes.
11161 \begin_layout Standard
11162 \begin_inset Float table
11167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11168 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11173 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11177 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11187 \begin_inset Tabular
11188 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11189 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11307 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11466 \begin_inset Index idx
11469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11478 \begin_layout Standard
11479 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11480 feature for adding extra space
11481 in a uniform fashion.
11482 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11483 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11484 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11485 equally between themselves.
11488 \begin_layout Standard
11489 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11492 \begin_layout Quote
11494 This is on the left side
11495 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11498 This is on the right
11501 \begin_layout Quote
11504 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11508 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11514 \begin_layout Quote
11517 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11521 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11525 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11531 \begin_layout Standard
11532 That was an example in the
11538 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11542 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11546 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11549 is one in a standard paragraph.
11550 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11554 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11558 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11561 \begin_inset space ~
11566 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11569 \begin_layout Standard
11571 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11575 \begin_inset space ~
11581 \begin_layout Standard
11583 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11587 \begin_inset space ~
11593 \begin_layout Standard
11595 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11599 \begin_inset space ~
11605 \begin_layout Standard
11607 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11611 \begin_inset space ~
11617 \begin_layout Standard
11619 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11623 \begin_inset space ~
11629 \begin_layout Standard
11631 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11635 \begin_inset space ~
11641 \begin_layout Standard
11642 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11650 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11654 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11656 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11657 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11661 option in the space dialog.
11669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11673 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11678 \begin_inset Index idx
11681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11690 \begin_layout Standard
11691 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11692 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11695 \begin_layout Standard
11696 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11699 What is correct English?:
11700 \begin_inset Newline newline
11704 \begin_inset Newline newline
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11711 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11712 \begin_inset Newline newline
11716 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11727 \begin_inset Newline newline
11731 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11742 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11748 \begin_layout Standard
11750 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11755 \begin_inset space ~
11759 \begin_inset space ~
11763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11767 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11774 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11780 \begin_inset space ~
11784 \begin_inset space ~
11788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11791 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11800 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11801 That is why it is named
11802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11810 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11811 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11815 \begin_layout Subsection
11817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11819 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11824 \begin_inset Index idx
11827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11836 \begin_layout Standard
11837 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11839 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11840 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11842 \begin_inset space ~
11848 There you find the following sizes:
11851 \begin_layout Standard
11864 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11865 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11870 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11873 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11875 \begin_inset space ~
11881 \begin_inset Index idx
11884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11885 Document ! Settings
11890 for the paragraph separation.
11891 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11902 \begin_layout Standard
11908 \begin_inset Index idx
11911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11917 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11918 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11923 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11924 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11933 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11942 s are described in section
11943 \begin_inset space ~
11947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11949 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11958 If there are several
11962 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11963 You can therefore use
11967 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11970 \begin_layout Standard
11975 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11976 \begin_inset space ~
11980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11982 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11989 \begin_layout Standard
11990 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12000 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12001 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12013 \begin_layout Subsection
12014 Paragraph Alignment
12015 \begin_inset Index idx
12018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12019 Paragraph ! Alignment
12027 \begin_layout Standard
12028 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12030 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12033 dialog (toolbar button
12036 arg "layout-paragraph"
12040 There are five possibilities:
12043 \begin_layout Itemize
12051 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12057 \begin_layout Itemize
12065 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12071 \begin_layout Itemize
12079 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12085 \begin_layout Itemize
12093 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12099 \begin_layout Itemize
12107 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12113 \begin_layout Standard
12114 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12115 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12116 the left and right margins.
12117 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12118 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12124 \begin_layout Standard
12126 This paragraph is right aligned,
12129 \begin_layout Standard
12131 this one is centered,
12134 \begin_layout Standard
12136 this one is left aligned.
12139 \begin_layout Subsection
12141 \begin_inset Index idx
12144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12145 Page breaks ! Forced
12151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12153 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12160 \begin_layout Standard
12161 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12162 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12163 force a page break where you want one.
12164 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12165 is good at page breaking.
12166 Only if you use a lot of
12170 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12171 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12174 \begin_layout Standard
12175 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12176 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12180 have to change the page breaking.
12183 \begin_layout Standard
12184 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12186 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12188 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12189 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 \begin_inset space ~
12197 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12200 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12202 \begin_inset space ~
12207 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12209 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12210 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12213 \begin_layout Standard
12214 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12215 at the top of a page.
12216 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12218 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12219 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12220 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12224 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12228 to learn more about
12235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12239 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12244 \begin_inset Index idx
12247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12248 Page breaks ! Clear
12256 \begin_layout Standard
12257 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12258 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12259 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12260 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12261 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12264 \begin_layout Standard
12265 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 \begin_inset space ~
12276 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12279 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12281 \begin_inset space ~
12285 \begin_inset space ~
12290 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12291 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12294 \begin_layout Subsection
12296 \begin_inset Index idx
12299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12308 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12315 \begin_layout Standard
12316 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12318 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12320 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12321 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12323 \begin_inset space ~
12327 \begin_inset space ~
12335 arg "newline-insert newline"
12339 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12342 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12344 \begin_inset space ~
12348 \begin_inset space ~
12356 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12359 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12361 This is useful to avoid
12362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12369 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12372 \begin_layout Standard
12373 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12374 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12376 very good at line breaking.
12377 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12378 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12379 \begin_inset space ~
12383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12385 reference "sec:Quote"
12390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12392 reference "sec:Verse"
12397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12399 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12406 \begin_layout Subsection
12408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12410 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12415 \begin_inset Index idx
12418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12427 \begin_layout Standard
12429 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12440 \begin_layout Standard
12444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12445 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12447 \begin_inset space ~
12452 you can insert horizontal lines.
12453 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12454 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12455 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12458 \begin_layout Standard
12460 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12471 \begin_layout Section
12472 Characters and Symbols
12475 \begin_layout Standard
12476 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12477 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12478 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12486 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12490 for information on how this is done.
12493 \begin_layout Standard
12494 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12499 dialog via the menu
12501 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12502 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12508 \begin_layout Standard
12509 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12517 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12518 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12520 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12528 \begin_layout Section
12529 Fonts and Text Styles
12530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12532 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12539 \begin_layout Subsection
12541 \begin_inset Index idx
12544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 \begin_layout Standard
12554 There are two types of fonts:
12557 \begin_layout Description
12559 \begin_inset space ~
12563 \begin_inset Index idx
12566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12572 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12577 characters) in the font.
12578 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12579 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12580 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12581 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12582 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12583 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12584 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12585 \begin_inset Newline newline
12588 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12589 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12590 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12591 sizes than at small ones.
12592 \begin_inset Newline newline
12606 \begin_inset space ~
12614 \begin_layout Description
12616 \begin_inset space ~
12620 \begin_inset Index idx
12623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12629 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12630 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12631 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12632 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12633 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12634 image manipulation program.
12635 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12636 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12637 \begin_inset space ~
12640 pixels high up to 34
12641 \begin_inset space ~
12644 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12645 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12646 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12648 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12649 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12650 \begin_inset Newline newline
12653 Bitmap fonts are named
12656 \begin_inset space ~
12661 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12664 \begin_layout Standard
12665 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12666 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12667 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12668 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12669 use scalable fonts.
12672 \begin_layout Standard
12673 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12676 \begin_layout Standard
12677 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12678 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12679 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12680 font to emphasize text, you use an
12681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12689 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12691 In \SpecialChar LyX
12692 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12696 \begin_layout Subsection
12699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12701 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12708 \begin_layout Standard
12709 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12710 used its own fonts.
12711 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12712 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12715 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12716 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12717 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12718 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12719 to a word processor.
12720 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12721 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12722 files are very portable across
12723 different machines.
12724 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12725 has increased a lot
12726 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12729 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12731 \begin_inset space ~
12735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12737 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12742 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12743 code in the document
12744 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12747 \begin_layout Standard
12748 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12749 engines that are also able directly
12750 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12752 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12754 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12756 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12757 that is installed on your system.
12758 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12761 \begin_layout Standard
12762 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12770 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12771 es; so you might have to experiment.
12779 \begin_layout Standard
12780 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12789 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12790 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12791 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12792 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12801 \begin_layout Subsection
12802 Document Font and Font size
12803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12805 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12810 \begin_inset Index idx
12813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12820 \begin_inset Index idx
12823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12832 \begin_layout Standard
12833 You can set the document fonts in the
12835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12839 \begin_inset Index idx
12842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12843 Document ! Settings
12853 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12854 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12857 \begin_inset space ~
12866 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12868 \begin_inset space ~
12871 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12874 \begin_layout Standard
12881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12890 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12891 This requires that you use
12897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12936 as the output format, i.
12937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12941 \begin_inset space \space{}
12944 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12945 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12946 installed (see section
12947 \begin_inset space ~
12951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12953 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12958 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12960 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12961 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12963 \begin_inset space ~
12966 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12967 cannot determine the family.
12968 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12969 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12972 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12975 \begin_layout Standard
12976 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12977 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12982 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12988 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12989 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12997 \begin_inset space ~
13003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13016 European Computer Modern
13019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13026 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
13029 \begin_layout Standard
13038 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
13039 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13044 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
13047 \begin_inset space ~
13052 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13058 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13059 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13062 \begin_layout Itemize
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13071 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13084 \begin_inset space ~
13089 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13090 community in order to replace
13094 as the default font.
13095 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13096 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13099 \begin_inset space ~
13112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13113 One difference is improved kerning.
13121 \begin_layout Itemize
13125 \begin_inset space ~
13129 \begin_inset space ~
13134 fonts in (the rare) case that
13137 \begin_inset space ~
13142 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13157 Virtual means that it
13158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13169 -glyphs from other fonts.
13170 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13192 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13198 \begin_inset Index idx
13201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13203 -packages ! aeguill
13208 with the document preamble line
13209 \begin_inset Newline newline
13216 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13217 \begin_inset Newline newline
13222 will fix the guillemet problem.
13227 and that accented characters are not
13231 glyph, but built of
13235 characters, the accent and the letter.
13236 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13242 If you search for example for the French word
13243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13250 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13259 and not for the glyph
13260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13264 \begin_inset space ~
13268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13274 \begin_layout Itemize
13275 If you do not like the look of
13283 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13288 \begin_inset space ~
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13304 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13305 \begin_inset space ~
13308 serif and typewriter fonts,
13312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13313 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13320 \begin_inset space ~
13329 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13334 \begin_inset space \space{}
13342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13346 \begin_inset space \space{}
13352 \begin_inset space ~
13360 \begin_inset space ~
13370 but you can also select your own.
13371 \begin_inset Newline newline
13374 The differences between roman,
13377 \begin_inset space ~
13386 fonts are explained in section
13387 \begin_inset space ~
13391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13393 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13398 \begin_inset Newline newline
13404 \begin_inset space ~
13409 was originally designed for newspapers.
13410 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13411 into the small newspaper columns.
13415 \begin_inset space ~
13420 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13423 \begin_layout Standard
13424 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13437 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13442 depends on the class you are using.
13443 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13446 \begin_layout Standard
13447 Note that the font size is the
13452 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13453 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13454 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13455 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13458 \begin_inset space ~
13464 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13465 \begin_inset space ~
13469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13471 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13478 \begin_layout Standard
13482 \begin_inset space ~
13487 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13489 \begin_inset space ~
13492 serif or typewriter.
13497 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13507 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13510 \begin_layout Standard
13519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13528 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13529 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13535 \begin_inset Index idx
13538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13540 -packages ! fontenc
13546 \begin_inset space ~
13550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13552 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13557 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13558 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13565 \begin_layout Standard
13566 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13568 Use Old Style Figures
13572 Use True Small Caps
13575 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13578 Use Old Style Figures
13580 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13582 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13590 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13594 Use True Small Caps
13596 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13597 of scaled capitals.
13598 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13599 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13602 \begin_layout Standard
13607 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13608 a font to display the script characters.
13612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13613 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13619 \begin_inset Index idx
13622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13629 So this has no effect for the document language
13643 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13647 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13655 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13660 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13661 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13663 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13665 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13668 dialog, see section
13669 \begin_inset space ~
13673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13675 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13687 \begin_layout Subsection
13691 \begin_layout Standard
13692 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13693 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13695 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13696 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13697 choose a math font in the dialog
13699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13703 \begin_inset Index idx
13706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13707 Document ! Settings
13713 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13714 automatically selects a math font.
13715 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13716 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13725 \begin_inset space ~
13731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13736 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13737 document font is available.
13740 \begin_layout Standard
13741 Note that the math font will not be used for
13745 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13751 or by the insertion of the command
13758 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13759 \begin_inset space ~
13763 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13764 while the math characters do not.
13766 \begin_inset space ~
13769 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13772 \begin_inset space ~
13780 \begin_inset space ~
13785 in the document font settings.
13788 \begin_layout Standard
13789 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13790 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13791 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13792 font (in most cases
13793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13799 \begin_inset space ~
13805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13808 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13809 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13817 \begin_inset space ~
13823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13829 \begin_layout Subsection
13830 Using Different Character Styles
13831 \begin_inset Index idx
13834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13841 \begin_inset Index idx
13844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13853 \begin_layout Standard
13854 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13855 automatically changes the character style for certain
13856 paragraph environments.
13858 supports two character styles,
13867 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13871 \begin_layout Standard
13876 style, do one of the following:
13879 \begin_layout Itemize
13880 click on the toolbar button
13889 \begin_layout Itemize
13890 use the key binding
13899 \begin_layout Standard
13900 These commands are all toggles.
13905 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13908 \begin_layout Standard
13909 One typically uses the
13913 style for proper names.
13915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13922 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13930 \begin_layout Standard
13931 A more widely used character style is the
13936 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13943 \begin_layout Itemize
13944 clicking on the toolbar button
13953 \begin_layout Itemize
13954 using the keybindings
13963 \begin_layout Standard
13968 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13970 use a different font.
13973 \begin_layout Standard
13974 We've been using the
13978 style all over the place in this document.
13979 Here's one more example:
13982 \begin_layout Quotation
13985 Do not overuse character styles!
13988 \begin_layout Standard
13989 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13990 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13991 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13992 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13996 \begin_layout Standard
13997 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
14005 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14007 \begin_inset space ~
14010 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14016 arg "dialog-show character"
14022 \begin_layout Subsection
14023 Fine-Tuning with the
14028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14030 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14035 \begin_inset Index idx
14038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14047 \begin_layout Standard
14048 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
14050 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
14051 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14052 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14053 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14054 from ordinary dialog.
14057 \begin_layout Standard
14058 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
14059 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
14060 \begin_inset Newline newline
14063 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14064 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14067 \begin_layout Standard
14068 To use custom character styles, open the
14070 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14072 \begin_inset space ~
14075 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14078 dialog or press the toolbar button
14081 arg "dialog-show character"
14085 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14086 font property that you can choose.
14087 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14090 \begin_inset space ~
14095 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14100 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14101 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14102 environments all at once.
14105 \begin_layout Standard
14106 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
14109 \begin_inset space ~
14121 \begin_layout Labeling
14122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14136 The possible options are:
14137 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14144 \begin_layout Labeling
14145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14150 This is the Roman font family.
14151 Normally a serif font.
14152 It's also the default family.
14162 \begin_layout Labeling
14163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14167 \begin_inset space ~
14174 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14186 \begin_layout Labeling
14187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14194 This is the Typewriter font family.
14200 arg "font-typewriter"
14209 \begin_layout Labeling
14210 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14215 This corresponds to the print weight.
14217 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14224 \begin_layout Labeling
14225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14230 This is the Medium font series.
14231 It's also the default series.
14234 \begin_layout Labeling
14235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14242 This is the Bold font series.
14255 \begin_layout Labeling
14256 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14261 As the name implies.
14263 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14270 \begin_layout Labeling
14271 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14276 This is the Upright font shape.
14277 It's also the default shape.
14280 \begin_layout Labeling
14281 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14295 s the Italic font shape
14301 \begin_layout Labeling
14302 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14309 This is the Slanted font shape
14311 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14312 , this is different from italic).
14315 \begin_layout Labeling
14316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14320 \begin_inset space ~
14327 This is the Small caps font shape
14334 \begin_layout Labeling
14335 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14340 Alters the text color.
14341 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14345 \begin_inset space ~
14350 , which means that the document default color set in
14352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14353 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14359 \begin_inset space ~
14364 is used, you can choose between
14397 \begin_inset Index idx
14400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14409 \begin_layout Labeling
14410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14415 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14416 the language of the document.
14417 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14418 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14420 \begin_inset Newline newline
14423 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14425 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14426 When using the spell checking (see section
14427 \begin_inset space ~
14431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14433 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14437 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14440 \begin_layout Labeling
14441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14446 Alters the size of the font.
14447 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14448 proportional to the document font size.
14449 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14450 the details, but a general description of what
14453 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14460 \begin_layout Labeling
14461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 arg "font-size tiny"
14488 \begin_layout Labeling
14489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14510 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14516 \begin_layout Labeling
14517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14538 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14544 \begin_layout Labeling
14545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14566 arg "font-size small"
14572 \begin_layout Labeling
14573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14587 It's also the default size.
14591 arg "font-size normal"
14597 \begin_layout Labeling
14598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14619 arg "font-size large"
14625 \begin_layout Labeling
14626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14647 arg "font-size larger"
14653 \begin_layout Labeling
14654 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14675 arg "font-size largest"
14681 \begin_layout Labeling
14682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14703 arg "font-size huge"
14709 \begin_layout Labeling
14710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14731 arg "font-size giant"
14737 \begin_layout Labeling
14738 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14743 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14763 arg "font-size increase"
14769 \begin_layout Labeling
14770 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14775 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14795 arg "font-size decrease"
14802 \begin_layout Standard
14807 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14808 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14810 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14811 — use those instead.
14812 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14815 \begin_layout Labeling
14816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14821 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14823 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14830 \begin_layout Labeling
14831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14838 This is text with emphasize on
14841 This might seem like the same as
14845 , but it is actually a bit different.
14851 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14853 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14856 \begin_layout Labeling
14857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14864 This is text with Underbar on.
14870 arg "font-underline"
14876 \begin_inset Newline newline
14881 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14882 when you could not change fonts.
14883 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14884 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14885 because some people
14889 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14892 \begin_layout Labeling
14893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14897 \begin_inset space ~
14904 This is text with Double underbar on.
14910 arg "font-underunderline"
14914 \begin_inset Newline newline
14917 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14918 about double underbar.
14921 \begin_layout Labeling
14922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14926 \begin_inset space ~
14933 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14939 arg "font-underwave"
14943 \begin_inset Newline newline
14946 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14947 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14950 \begin_layout Labeling
14951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14958 This is text with Strikeout on.
14964 arg "font-strikeout"
14968 \begin_inset Newline newline
14971 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14972 changed in the meantime.
14975 \begin_layout Labeling
14976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14983 This is text with Noun on.
14990 , this is a logical attribute.
14991 Normally it's equivalent to
14994 \begin_inset space ~
15003 \begin_layout Standard
15004 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
15005 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
15007 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15009 \begin_inset space ~
15012 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15018 arg "dialog-show character"
15021 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
15022 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
15025 arg "textstyle-apply"
15029 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
15033 \begin_layout Standard
15034 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
15041 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
15042 (suppose you just set the shape to
15043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15061 \begin_inset space ~
15073 \begin_layout Standard
15074 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
15082 \begin_inset space ~
15094 \begin_layout Itemize
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15107 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15125 \begin_inset Newline newline
15129 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15143 \begin_inset Note Note
15146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15147 For more on phantoms see section
15148 \begin_inset space ~
15152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15154 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15164 \begin_inset Newline newline
15170 \begin_layout Itemize
15175 fonts use characters with serifs.
15176 These are the small
15177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15184 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15185 The following example shows the difference:
15186 \begin_inset Newline newline
15190 \begin_inset Newline newline
15195 text without serifs
15198 \begin_inset Newline newline
15201 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15202 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15209 \begin_layout Itemize
15214 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15215 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15216 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15219 \begin_layout Standard
15220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15227 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15228 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15231 \begin_inset space ~
15236 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15237 the property to be removed.
15238 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15239 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15240 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15258 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15259 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15267 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15271 \begin_inset space ~
15276 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15287 If you, for example, set
15288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15306 \begin_inset space ~
15311 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15320 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15323 \begin_layout Standard
15324 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15325 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15328 \begin_layout Section
15329 Printing and Previewing
15332 \begin_layout Subsection
15336 \begin_layout Standard
15337 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15338 using \SpecialChar LyX
15339 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15340 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15341 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15342 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15344 Additional Features
15349 \begin_layout Standard
15351 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15354 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15355 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15356 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15359 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15360 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15361 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15362 to turn your writing into printable output.
15363 This happens in two stages:
15366 \begin_layout Enumerate
15367 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15368 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15370 a file with the extension,
15371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15385 \begin_layout Enumerate
15386 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15387 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15388 to use the commands in the
15392 file to produce printable output.
15395 \begin_layout Subsection
15396 Output file formats
15397 \begin_inset Index idx
15400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15409 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15417 Simple text (ASCII)
15418 \begin_inset Index idx
15421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15422 File formats ! ASCII
15430 \begin_layout Standard
15431 This file type has the extension
15432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15444 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15448 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15455 \begin_layout Standard
15456 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15458 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15459 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15461 \begin_inset space ~
15467 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15468 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15469 bibliography (section
15470 \begin_inset space ~
15474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15476 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15481 If your document includes such material, use
15483 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15484 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15486 \begin_inset space ~
15490 \begin_inset space ~
15494 \begin_inset space ~
15502 \begin_inset space ~
15506 \begin_inset space ~
15512 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15513 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15516 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15519 \begin_inset Index idx
15522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15523 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15532 \begin_layout Standard
15533 This file type has the extension
15534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15545 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15548 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15549 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15550 -Errors or to process it manually
15551 with console commands.
15552 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15553 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15554 's temporary directory whenever you
15555 view or export your document.
15558 \begin_layout Standard
15559 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15560 -file using the menu
15562 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15563 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15578 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15579 export variants are explained in section
15580 \begin_inset space ~
15584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15586 reference "subsec:Export"
15593 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15595 \begin_inset Index idx
15598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15607 \begin_layout Standard
15608 This file type has the extension
15609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15629 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15630 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15631 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15635 \begin_layout Standard
15636 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15637 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15638 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15639 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15640 when you view the DVI.
15641 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15644 \begin_layout Standard
15645 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15647 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15648 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15653 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15654 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15656 \begin_inset space ~
15663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15673 The latter option uses the program
15675 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15681 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15684 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15685 font access (see section
15686 \begin_inset space ~
15690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15692 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15697 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15698 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15703 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15705 \begin_inset Index idx
15708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15709 File formats ! PostScript
15717 \begin_layout Standard
15718 This file type has the extension
15719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15731 PostScript was developed by the company
15735 as a printer language.
15736 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15738 PostScript can be seen as a
15739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15742 programming language
15743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15746 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15751 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15758 \begin_inset Index idx
15761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15763 -packages ! pstricks
15773 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15776 \begin_layout Standard
15777 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15781 Encapsulated PostScript
15782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15785 (EPS, file extension
15786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15798 As \SpecialChar LyX
15799 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15800 convert them in the background to EPS.
15801 If, for example, you have 50
15802 \begin_inset space ~
15805 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15807 \begin_inset space ~
15810 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15811 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15813 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15814 EPS to avoid this problem.
15817 \begin_layout Standard
15818 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15820 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15821 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15829 \begin_inset Index idx
15832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15839 \begin_inset Index idx
15842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15851 \begin_layout Standard
15852 This file type has the extension
15853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15869 Portable Document Format
15870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15877 was derived from PostScript.
15878 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15887 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15888 looks exactly the same.
15891 \begin_layout Standard
15892 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15896 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15900 (JPG, file extension
15901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15928 Portable Network Graphics
15929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15932 (PNG, file extension
15933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15945 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15946 converts them in the
15947 background to one of these formats.
15948 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15949 will slow down your workflow.
15950 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15953 \begin_layout Standard
15954 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15956 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15962 \begin_layout Description
15964 \begin_inset space ~
15967 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15971 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15974 \begin_layout Description
15976 \begin_inset space ~
15983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15990 X) This uses the program
15992 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15995 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15998 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16001 is a new engine, derived from
16005 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16006 access (see section
16007 \begin_inset space ~
16011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16013 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16018 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16019 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16024 \begin_layout Description
16026 \begin_inset space ~
16033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16040 X) This uses the program
16045 that converts your file directly to PDF.
16051 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16052 font access (see section
16053 \begin_inset space ~
16057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16059 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16064 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16065 vertically written Japanese.
16068 \begin_layout Description
16070 \begin_inset space ~
16073 (cropped) This is the same as
16076 \begin_inset space ~
16081 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
16082 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
16083 to generate good-looking
16084 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
16087 \begin_layout Description
16089 \begin_inset space ~
16092 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
16096 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
16100 \begin_layout Description
16102 \begin_inset space ~
16105 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
16109 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
16110 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
16114 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
16115 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
16118 \begin_layout Standard
16122 \begin_inset space ~
16131 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
16132 works without problems.
16133 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
16134 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
16138 \begin_inset space ~
16145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16157 \begin_inset space ~
16164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16173 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16183 \begin_inset Index idx
16186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16187 FileFormats ! XHTML
16193 \begin_inset Index idx
16196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16205 \begin_layout Standard
16206 This file type has the extension
16207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16219 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16220 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16221 When \SpecialChar LyX
16222 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16223 suitable for the purpose.
16224 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16226 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16227 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16230 between different formats, which are described in section
16232 Math Output in XHTML
16237 \begin_inset space ~
16245 \begin_layout Standard
16246 XHTML output remains
16247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16254 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16255 features are supported yet.
16259 and the World Wide Web
16263 Additional Features
16265 manual, for more information.
16268 \begin_layout Standard
16269 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16271 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16272 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16279 \begin_layout Subsection
16281 \begin_inset Index idx
16284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16293 \begin_layout Standard
16294 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16295 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16304 or use the toolbar button
16311 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16312 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
16313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16319 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16323 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16331 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16336 Further output formats can be selected via
16338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16339 View (Other Formats)
16341 or the toolbar button
16342 \begin_inset Graphics
16343 filename ../images/view-others.png
16345 groupId toolbarbuttons
16352 \begin_layout Standard
16353 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16354 viewer window using the menu
16356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16362 Update (Other Formats)
16367 \begin_layout Standard
16368 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16371 To have a real output, export your document.
16374 \begin_layout Section
16375 A few Words about Typography
16376 \begin_inset Index idx
16379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16388 \begin_layout Subsection
16389 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16390 \begin_inset Index idx
16393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16400 \begin_inset Index idx
16403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16412 \begin_layout Standard
16413 In \SpecialChar LyX
16415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16426 character comes in four lengths: the
16438 , and the minus sign:
16439 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16445 \begin_layout Standard
16446 \begin_inset Tabular
16447 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16448 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16449 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16450 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16451 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16452 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16481 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16521 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16548 \begin_inset space ~
16551 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16558 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16585 \begin_inset space ~
16588 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16609 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16643 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16649 \begin_layout Standard
16650 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16662 character multiple times in a row.
16663 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16664 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16697 \begin_layout Standard
16698 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16699 math mode and has a length of its own.
16700 Here are some examples:
16703 \begin_layout Enumerate
16704 line- and page-breaks
16705 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16715 \begin_layout Enumerate
16717 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16727 \begin_layout Enumerate
16728 Oh — there's a dash.
16729 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16739 \begin_layout Enumerate
16740 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16744 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16754 \begin_layout Subsection
16756 \begin_inset Index idx
16759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16768 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16775 \begin_layout Standard
16776 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16777 but automatically in the output.
16778 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16784 \begin_inset Index idx
16787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16794 following the rules of the document language.
16797 \begin_layout Standard
16799 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16803 font and with unusual constructs, like
16804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16812 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16813 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16814 This is done with the menu
16816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16817 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16819 \begin_inset space ~
16825 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16827 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16831 \begin_layout Standard
16832 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16833 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16844 would then see the hyphen
16845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16852 as a hyphenation possibility.
16853 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16854 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16855 as described in section
16856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16859 Prevent Hyphenation
16860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16866 \begin_inset space ~
16874 \begin_layout Subsection
16876 \begin_inset Index idx
16879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16888 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16889 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16892 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16899 \begin_layout Standard
16900 When \SpecialChar LyX
16901 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16902 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16904 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16910 appropriate amount of space.
16911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16914 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16916 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16917 gets after another word.
16920 \begin_layout Standard
16921 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16922 not work in all cases.
16924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16935 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16936 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16939 \begin_layout Standard
16940 Here are some examples of
16944 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16947 \begin_layout Itemize
16952 \begin_layout Itemize
16957 \begin_layout Standard
16958 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16961 \begin_layout Itemize
16963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16967 this is too much space!
16970 \begin_layout Itemize
16975 \begin_layout Standard
16976 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16979 \begin_layout Standard
16980 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16983 \begin_layout Enumerate
16987 \begin_inset space ~
16992 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16993 \begin_inset space ~
16997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16999 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17004 \begin_inset Index idx
17007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17008 Spaces ! inter-word
17016 \begin_layout Enumerate
17020 \begin_inset space ~
17025 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17026 \begin_inset space ~
17030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17032 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17037 \begin_inset Index idx
17040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17049 \begin_layout Enumerate
17053 \begin_inset space ~
17057 \begin_inset space ~
17061 \begin_inset space ~
17068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17070 \begin_inset space ~
17075 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17076 This function is also bound to
17079 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17085 \begin_layout Standard
17086 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17089 \begin_layout Itemize
17091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17095 \begin_inset space \space{}
17098 this is too much space!
17101 \begin_layout Itemize
17102 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17106 \begin_layout Standard
17107 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17108 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17110 will take care of this.
17113 \begin_layout Standard
17114 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17118 \begin_inset space ~
17124 feature described in the section
17126 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17131 Additional Features
17136 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17138 \begin_inset Index idx
17141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17142 Typography ! Quotes
17148 \begin_inset Index idx
17151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17182 \begin_layout Standard
17184 usually sets quotes correctly.
17185 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
17186 and use a closing quote at the end.
17188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17196 The keyboard character,
17200 , generates this automatically.
17203 \begin_layout Standard
17204 You can specify what character the
17208 key produces using the submenu
17214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17218 \begin_inset Index idx
17221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17222 Document ! Settings
17232 There are six choices:
17235 \begin_layout Labeling
17236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17259 \begin_layout Labeling
17260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17263 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17267 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17273 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17277 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17283 \begin_layout Labeling
17284 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17287 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17291 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17297 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17301 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17307 \begin_layout Labeling
17308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17311 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17315 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17321 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17325 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17331 \begin_layout Labeling
17332 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17335 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17339 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17345 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17349 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17355 \begin_layout Labeling
17356 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17359 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17363 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17369 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17373 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17379 \begin_layout Standard
17380 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17383 arg "quote-insert single"
17389 \begin_layout Subsection
17391 \begin_inset Index idx
17394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17395 Typography ! Ligatures
17401 \begin_inset Index idx
17404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17435 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17442 \begin_layout Standard
17443 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17444 print them as single characters.
17445 These groups are known as
17450 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17451 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17453 Here are the standard ligatures:
17456 \begin_layout Itemize
17460 \begin_layout Itemize
17464 \begin_layout Itemize
17468 \begin_layout Itemize
17472 \begin_layout Itemize
17476 \begin_layout Standard
17477 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17480 \begin_layout Standard
17481 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17482 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17490 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17506 To break a ligature, use
17508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17509 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17511 \begin_inset space ~
17518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17529 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17546 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17554 \begin_layout Subsection
17557 \begin_inset Index idx
17560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17570 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17577 \begin_layout Standard
17578 You will certainly have noticed that the word “\SpecialChar LaTeX
17579 ” always appears with characters
17580 in different sizes and positions.
17582 is the name of the program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17583 and is therefore recognized as a proper
17584 name when you type it in \SpecialChar LyX
17586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17605 \begin_inset Note Note
17608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17609 The braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17610 Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper name
17611 in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17616 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! \SpecialChar LyX
17617 recognizes the following
17621 \begin_layout Description
17623 The name of the game, write
17624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17645 \begin_layout Description
17647 The program used by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17670 \begin_layout Description
17672 The program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17695 \begin_layout Description
17696 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17697 The actual version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17720 \begin_layout Standard
17721 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17727 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17735 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17736 -world to give programs geek version numbers.
17737 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17738 converges to the number
17739 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17742 : The actual version is
17743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17751 , the previous one was
17752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17763 \begin_layout Standard
17764 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17765 you can insert two empty braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17767 In \SpecialChar LyX
17768 this will look like
17769 \begin_inset Graphics
17770 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17776 \begin_inset Newline newline
17779 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
17781 \begin_inset space ~
17785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17787 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17794 \begin_layout Subsection
17796 \begin_inset Index idx
17799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17808 \begin_layout Standard
17809 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17810 space between two words.
17811 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17821 for units use the menu
17823 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17824 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17826 \begin_inset space ~
17834 arg "space-insert thin"
17840 \begin_layout Standard
17841 Here is an example to show the differences:
17844 \begin_layout Standard
17845 \begin_inset Tabular
17846 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17847 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17848 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17849 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17856 \begin_inset space ~
17860 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17872 space between number and unit
17879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17888 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17900 half space between number and unit
17913 \begin_layout Subsection
17915 \begin_inset Index idx
17918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17919 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17927 \begin_layout Standard
17928 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17930 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17931 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17932 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17933 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17934 These bits of text became known as
17945 \begin_layout Standard
17946 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17947 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17948 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17949 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17950 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17951 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17952 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17953 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17954 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17955 \begin_inset Newline newline
17963 \begin_inset Newline newline
17971 \begin_inset Newline newline
17974 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17975 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17976 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17978 \begin_inset space ~
17982 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17984 key "latexcompanion"
17989 \begin_inset space ~
17993 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17999 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18000 's page break mechanism.
18003 \begin_layout Chapter
18004 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18007 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18014 \begin_layout Standard
18015 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18018 \begin_inset space ~
18024 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18027 \begin_layout Section
18029 \begin_inset Index idx
18032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18048 \begin_layout Standard
18050 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18053 \begin_layout Description
18056 \begin_inset space ~
18059 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18060 \begin_inset Newline newline
18064 \begin_inset Note Note
18067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18068 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18076 \begin_layout Description
18077 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18078 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18079 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18082 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18083 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18096 \begin_inset space ~
18102 \begin_inset Newline newline
18106 \begin_inset Note Comment
18109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18110 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18119 \begin_layout Description
18121 \begin_inset space ~
18124 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18125 set in the document settings under
18127 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18129 \begin_inset space ~
18135 \begin_inset Newline newline
18139 \begin_inset Newline newline
18143 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18152 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18153 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18158 of a comment that appears in the output.
18164 \begin_inset Newline newline
18168 \begin_inset Newline newline
18171 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18174 \begin_layout Standard
18175 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18187 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18190 \begin_layout Section
18192 \begin_inset Index idx
18195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18204 name "sec:Footnotes"
18211 \begin_layout Standard
18213 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18219 or the toolbar button
18222 arg "footnote-insert"
18234 \begin_inset Graphics
18235 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
18244 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18245 's representation of your footnote.
18255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18274 label, the box will
18278 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18279 Clicking on the box label again will close
18292 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18293 and click on the footnote
18308 \begin_layout Standard
18309 Here is an example footnote:
18317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18318 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18326 \begin_layout Standard
18327 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18328 position where the footnote box is placed.
18329 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18330 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18331 according to the document class.
18333 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18334 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18340 ey are described in the
18343 \begin_inset space ~
18351 \begin_layout Section
18353 \begin_inset Index idx
18356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18365 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18372 \begin_layout Standard
18373 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18375 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18379 \begin_inset space ~
18384 or the toolbar button
18387 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 appearing within your text.
18414 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18415 's representation of your margin
18424 \begin_layout Standard
18425 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18429 \begin_inset Marginal
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18434 This is a marginal note.
18442 \begin_layout Standard
18443 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18444 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18445 pages, right on odd pages.
18448 \begin_layout Standard
18449 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18452 \begin_inset space ~
18460 \begin_inset space ~
18468 \begin_layout Section
18469 Graphics and Images
18470 \begin_inset Index idx
18473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18480 \begin_inset Index idx
18483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18492 name "sec:Graphics"
18499 \begin_layout Standard
18500 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18501 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18504 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18509 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18513 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18516 \begin_layout Standard
18517 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18522 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18523 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18525 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18526 \begin_inset space ~
18530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18532 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18539 \begin_layout Standard
18544 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18545 of the image in the output.
18546 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18550 \begin_inset space ~
18554 \begin_inset space ~
18563 \begin_inset space ~
18567 \begin_inset space ~
18571 \begin_inset space ~
18576 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18577 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18585 \begin_layout Standard
18592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18600 \begin_inset space ~
18604 \begin_inset space ~
18611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18620 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18621 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18623 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18628 \begin_inset space ~
18633 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18634 with the image size is printed.
18638 \begin_inset space ~
18642 \begin_inset space ~
18646 \begin_inset space ~
18651 is explained in the
18654 \begin_inset space ~
18666 \begin_layout Standard
18667 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18668 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18670 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18671 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
18677 \begin_layout Standard
18679 \begin_inset Graphics
18680 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18688 \begin_layout Standard
18689 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18690 the image into a float, see section
18691 \begin_inset space ~
18695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18697 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18704 \begin_layout Subsection
18706 \begin_inset Index idx
18709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18718 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18725 \begin_layout Standard
18726 You can insert images in any known file format.
18727 But as we explained in section
18728 \begin_inset space ~
18732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18734 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18738 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18740 therefore uses the program
18744 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18745 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18746 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18753 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18760 \begin_layout Standard
18761 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18764 \begin_layout Description
18766 \begin_inset space ~
18769 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18770 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18771 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18775 Graphics Interchange Format
18776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18779 (GIF, file extension
18780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18792 \begin_inset Index idx
18795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18827 Portable Network Graphics
18828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18831 (PNG, file extension
18832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18844 \begin_inset Index idx
18847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18879 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18883 (JPG, file extension
18884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18908 \begin_inset Index idx
18911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18942 \begin_layout Description
18944 \begin_inset space ~
18947 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18949 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18950 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18951 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18952 \begin_inset Newline newline
18955 Scalable image formats can be
18956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18959 Scalable Vector Graphics
18960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18963 (SVG, file extension
18964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18976 \begin_inset Index idx
18979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19011 Encapsulated PostScript
19012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19015 (EPS, file extension
19016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19028 \begin_inset Index idx
19031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19063 Portable Document Format
19064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19067 (PDF, file extension
19068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19080 \begin_inset Index idx
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19098 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19099 result will not be scalable.
19100 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19106 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19114 \begin_layout Standard
19115 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19122 \begin_layout Subsection
19123 Grouping of Image Settings
19124 \begin_inset Index idx
19127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19128 Images ! Settings grouping
19136 \begin_layout Standard
19137 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19139 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19140 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19142 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19143 need to manually change each of them.
19147 \begin_layout Standard
19148 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19151 \begin_inset space ~
19155 \begin_inset space ~
19170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19178 \begin_inset space ~
19182 \begin_inset space ~
19189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19199 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19200 and checking the name of the desired group.
19203 \begin_layout Section
19205 \begin_inset Index idx
19208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19224 \begin_layout Standard
19225 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19228 arg "tabular-insert"
19233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19237 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19238 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19239 from the rest of the table.
19240 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19241 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19243 Here is an example table:
19244 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19250 \begin_layout Standard
19252 \begin_inset Tabular
19253 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19254 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19255 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19256 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19257 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19258 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19458 \begin_layout Subsection
19462 \begin_layout Standard
19463 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19466 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19470 This brings up the table dialog.
19471 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19472 cursor is placed currently.
19473 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19474 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19475 done on all of your selection.
19478 \begin_layout Standard
19479 In addition to the table dialog, the
19482 \begin_inset space ~
19487 helps you in setting table properties.
19488 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19491 \begin_layout Standard
19495 \begin_inset space ~
19500 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19501 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19502 current cell respectively.
19503 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19505 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19506 of text, see section
19507 \begin_inset space ~
19511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19513 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19520 \begin_layout Standard
19521 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19522 using the check box
19531 This will merge the cells to
19535 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19536 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19537 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19538 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19539 in the last row without the upper border:
19540 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19546 \begin_layout Standard
19548 \begin_inset Tabular
19549 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19550 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19551 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19552 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19553 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19650 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19685 \begin_layout Standard
19686 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19687 -arguments for the table.
19688 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19689 explained in the chapter
19696 \begin_inset space ~
19702 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19703 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19704 but are visible in the output.
19707 \begin_layout Standard
19708 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19716 Most DVI-viewers are
19720 able to display rotations.
19728 \begin_layout Standard
19733 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19738 adds lines for all cell borders.
19741 \begin_layout Subsection
19743 \begin_inset Index idx
19746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19747 Tables ! Longtables
19753 \begin_inset Index idx
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 \begin_layout Standard
19766 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19769 \begin_inset space ~
19773 \begin_inset space ~
19782 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19783 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19786 \begin_layout Description
19791 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19792 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19793 except for the first page, if
19796 \begin_inset space ~
19804 \begin_layout Description
19808 \begin_inset space ~
19813 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19814 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19817 \begin_layout Description
19822 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19823 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19824 except for the last page, if
19827 \begin_inset space ~
19835 \begin_layout Description
19839 \begin_inset space ~
19844 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19845 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19848 \begin_layout Description
19849 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19850 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19856 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19859 \begin_inset space ~
19867 \begin_layout Standard
19868 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19869 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19870 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19876 In this context, first means first in this order:
19879 \begin_inset space ~
19891 \begin_inset space ~
19896 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19897 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19903 \begin_layout Standard
19905 \begin_inset Tabular
19906 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19907 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19908 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19909 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19910 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19911 <row endfirsthead="true">
19912 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19918 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19923 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19942 <row endfirsthead="true">
19943 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19963 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <row endhead="true">
19976 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <row endhead="true">
20007 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20018 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <row endfoot="true">
20040 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20051 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21032 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21041 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21092 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21154 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21185 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21278 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21309 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21340 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21402 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21433 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21619 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21650 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21681 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21712 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21743 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21774 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21805 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21836 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21960 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21991 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 <row endlastfoot="true">
22022 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22033 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22042 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 \begin_layout Subsection
22061 \begin_inset Index idx
22064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22073 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22080 \begin_layout Standard
22081 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22082 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22083 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22084 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22088 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22091 \begin_layout Standard
22092 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22093 for the column in the table dialog.
22094 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22095 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22097 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
22103 \begin_layout Standard
22105 \begin_inset Tabular
22106 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22107 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22108 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22109 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22110 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22130 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 This is longer now.
22260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22312 This is longer now.
22317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 \begin_layout Standard
22344 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22345 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22351 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22357 Selection with the mouse or with
22361 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22362 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22363 the selection from outside the table.
22366 \begin_layout Section
22368 \begin_inset Index idx
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22387 \begin_layout Subsection
22391 \begin_layout Standard
22392 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22393 have a fixed location.
22395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22402 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22410 \begin_inset space ~
22415 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22416 too many notes on the current page.
22419 \begin_layout Standard
22420 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22421 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22422 and pages without text.
22423 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22424 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22425 Floats are therefore numbered.
22426 Referencing is described in section
22427 \begin_inset space ~
22431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22433 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22440 \begin_layout Standard
22441 To insert a float, use the menu
22443 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22447 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22448 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22450 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22451 \begin_inset Index idx
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22460 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22461 paragraph within the float.
22462 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22463 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22464 left-clicking on the box label.
22465 A closed float box looks like this:
22466 \begin_inset Graphics
22467 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
22472 – a gray button with a red label.
22475 \begin_layout Standard
22476 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22478 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22481 \begin_layout Subsection
22483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22485 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22490 \begin_inset Index idx
22493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22494 Floats ! Figure floats
22502 \begin_layout Standard
22504 \begin_inset space ~
22508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22510 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22514 was created using the menu
22516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22517 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22523 arg "float-insert figure"
22527 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22536 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22540 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22541 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22545 \begin_inset space ~
22553 arg "layout-paragraph"
22559 \begin_layout Standard
22560 \begin_inset Float figure
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22567 \begin_inset Graphics
22568 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22578 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22583 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22587 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22600 \begin_layout Standard
22601 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22602 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22613 ) and refer to it using the menu
22615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22621 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22625 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22626 vague references like
22627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22634 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22635 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22645 For more about cross-references, see section
22646 \begin_inset space ~
22650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22652 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22659 \begin_layout Standard
22660 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22661 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22662 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22663 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22664 as described in section
22665 \begin_inset space ~
22669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22671 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22677 \begin_inset space ~
22681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22683 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22687 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22688 You can also set the images one below the other.
22690 \begin_inset space ~
22694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22696 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22703 reference "fig:Platypus"
22707 are the subfigures.
22710 \begin_layout Standard
22711 \begin_inset Float figure
22716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22721 \begin_inset Float figure
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22732 name "fig:Undefinable"
22744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22745 \begin_inset Graphics
22746 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22757 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22761 \begin_inset Float figure
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22772 name "fig:Platypus"
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 \begin_inset Graphics
22786 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22798 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22810 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22814 Two distorted images.
22827 \begin_layout Subsection
22829 \begin_inset Index idx
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22833 Floats ! Table floats
22841 \begin_layout Standard
22842 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22845 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22848 or the toolbar button
22851 arg "float-insert table"
22855 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22856 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22857 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22859 \begin_inset space ~
22863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22865 reference "tab:Table-float"
22872 \begin_layout Standard
22873 \begin_inset Float table
22878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22879 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22884 name "tab:Table-float"
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22898 \begin_inset Tabular
22899 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22900 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22901 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22902 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22903 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23030 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23051 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23054 \end{array}\right]$
23062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23075 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23096 \begin_layout Subsection
23098 \begin_inset Index idx
23101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23110 \begin_layout Standard
23112 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23113 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23114 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23116 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23124 \begin_inset space ~
23132 \begin_layout Section
23134 \begin_inset Index idx
23137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23146 \begin_layout Standard
23148 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23150 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23151 \begin_inset space \space{}
23158 \begin_layout Standard
23159 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23160 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23166 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23167 and its alignment within the page.
23168 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
23174 \begin_layout Standard
23176 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23186 height_special "totalheight"
23191 backgroundcolor "none"
23194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23197 This is a minipage.
23198 The text is set in an italic style.
23201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23205 another formatting.
23213 \begin_layout Standard
23214 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23217 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23221 as described in section
23222 \begin_inset space ~
23226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23228 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23233 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23239 \begin_layout Standard
23240 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23250 height_special "totalheight"
23255 backgroundcolor "none"
23258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23259 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23260 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23266 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23270 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23280 height_special "totalheight"
23285 backgroundcolor "none"
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23289 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23290 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23298 \begin_layout Standard
23299 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23305 \begin_layout Standard
23306 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23308 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23315 \begin_inset space ~
23323 \begin_layout Chapter
23324 Mathematical Formulas
23325 \begin_inset Index idx
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23335 \begin_inset Index idx
23338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23369 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23376 \begin_layout Standard
23377 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23382 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23385 \begin_layout Section
23387 \begin_inset Index idx
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23399 \begin_layout Standard
23400 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23413 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23415 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23416 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23417 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23425 \begin_layout Standard
23426 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23430 \begin_inset space ~
23435 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23438 \begin_layout Standard
23439 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23440 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23443 \begin_layout Standard
23444 This is a line with an inline formula
23445 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23451 \begin_layout Standard
23452 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23453 paragraph, like this one:
23454 \begin_inset Formula
23461 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23464 \begin_layout Standard
23466 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23468 For example, typing
23469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23482 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23483 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23487 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23490 \begin_inset space ~
23498 \begin_layout Subsection
23499 Navigating in Formulas
23500 \begin_inset Index idx
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 \begin_layout Standard
23513 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23514 achieved with the arrow keys.
23516 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23517 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23522 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23523 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23527 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23531 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23534 \end{array}\right]$
23542 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23547 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23548 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23551 \begin_layout Standard
23556 , printed in this document as
23557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23561 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23568 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23569 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23570 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23575 For example, if you want
23576 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23584 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23594 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23598 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23603 , since in the latter case only the
23606 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23611 will be under the square root sign:
23612 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23618 \begin_layout Standard
23619 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23621 \begin_inset Formula
23623 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23632 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23633 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23636 \begin_layout Subsection
23640 \begin_layout Standard
23641 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23642 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23646 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23647 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23648 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23649 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23650 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23654 \begin_layout Subsection
23655 Exponents and Subscripts
23656 \begin_inset Index idx
23659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23666 \begin_inset Index idx
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23678 \begin_layout Standard
23679 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23682 arg "math-superscript"
23688 arg "math-subscript"
23691 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23693 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23696 , type in a formula
23699 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23709 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23715 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23719 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23725 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23731 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23740 , you have to use an extra
23744 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23745 For example, if you want
23746 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23752 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23758 Subscripts are similar: To get
23759 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23765 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23773 \begin_layout Subsection
23775 \begin_inset Index idx
23778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23787 \begin_layout Standard
23788 Create a fraction either with the command
23794 or by using the icon
23797 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23803 \begin_inset space ~
23809 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23810 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23811 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23816 To move back up, press
23821 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23822 \begin_inset Formula
23824 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23827 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23835 \begin_layout Subsection
23837 \begin_inset Index idx
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23849 \begin_layout Standard
23850 Roots can be created using the
23853 \begin_inset space ~
23861 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23867 arg "math-insert \\root"
23889 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23895 always produces a square root.
23898 \begin_layout Subsection
23899 Operators with Limits
23900 \begin_inset Index idx
23903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23910 \begin_inset Index idx
23913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23922 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23929 \begin_layout Standard
23931 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23935 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23938 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23939 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23940 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23941 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23942 The sum operator will automatically place its
23943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23950 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23952 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23956 \begin_inset Formula
23958 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23963 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23967 \begin_layout Standard
23968 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23970 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23971 behind the operator and using the menu
23973 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23974 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23976 \begin_inset space ~
23980 \begin_inset space ~
23994 \begin_layout Standard
23995 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24004 \begin_inset Index idx
24007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24014 \begin_inset Formula
24016 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24021 which will place the
24022 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24034 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24035 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24041 \begin_layout Standard
24042 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24049 Have a look at section
24050 \begin_inset space ~
24054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24056 reference "subsec:Functions"
24060 for an explanation of function macros.
24063 \begin_layout Subsection
24065 \begin_inset Index idx
24068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24077 \begin_layout Standard
24078 Most math symbols can be found in the
24081 \begin_inset space ~
24086 under one of several categories; including
24103 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24107 \begin_layout Standard
24108 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24109 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24110 don't have to use the
24113 \begin_inset space ~
24118 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24120 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24123 \begin_layout Subsection
24125 \begin_inset Index idx
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24137 \begin_layout Standard
24138 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24144 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24150 \begin_inset space ~
24158 arg "math-insert \\space"
24162 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24163 For example, the sequence
24168 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24171 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24173 \begin_inset Graphics
24174 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24179 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24180 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24181 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24182 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24183 , because they are negative
24185 Here are two examples:
24188 \begin_layout Standard
24198 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24204 \begin_layout Standard
24214 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24220 \begin_layout Subsection
24222 \begin_inset Index idx
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24234 name "subsec:Functions"
24241 \begin_layout Standard
24245 \begin_inset space ~
24250 contains under the button
24253 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24256 a number of function macros, such as
24257 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24261 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24269 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24276 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24277 avoid confusions, because
24278 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24282 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24288 \begin_layout Standard
24289 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24291 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24295 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24301 \begin_layout Standard
24302 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24303 are placed, as described in section
24304 \begin_inset space ~
24308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24310 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24317 \begin_layout Subsection
24319 \begin_inset Index idx
24322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24331 \begin_layout Standard
24332 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24334 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24335 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24336 commands, for example, to enter
24337 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24340 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24341 Our example is entered by typing
24346 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24353 \begin_inset space ~
24357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24359 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24363 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24366 \begin_layout Standard
24367 \begin_inset Float table
24372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24373 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24378 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24382 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24392 \begin_inset Tabular
24393 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24394 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24397 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24535 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24589 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24643 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24697 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24751 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24805 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24859 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24913 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24958 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24979 \begin_layout Standard
24980 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24983 \begin_inset space ~
24991 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24994 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24998 \begin_layout Section
24999 Brackets and Delimiters
25000 \begin_inset Index idx
25003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25010 \begin_inset Index idx
25013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25022 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25029 \begin_layout Standard
25030 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25032 For some purposes, using just the keys
25037 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25038 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25039 toolbar delimiter icon
25042 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25046 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25047 \begin_inset Formula
25049 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25057 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25058 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25062 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25065 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25071 \begin_inset Formula
25073 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25081 \begin_layout Standard
25082 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25083 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25087 \begin_layout Standard
25088 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25089 left side and right side.
25090 If you use the option
25093 \begin_inset space ~
25098 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25099 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25101 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25106 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25107 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25110 \begin_layout Standard
25111 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25112 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25113 is to go inside the brackets.
25114 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25119 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25120 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25121 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25125 arg "math-delim ( )"
25131 \begin_layout Section
25132 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25133 \begin_inset Index idx
25136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25143 \begin_inset Index idx
25146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 \begin_inset Index idx
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25165 \begin_layout Standard
25166 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25170 \begin_inset space ~
25178 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25182 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25183 Here is an example:
25184 \begin_inset Formula
25186 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25195 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25196 \begin_inset space ~
25200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25202 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25207 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25208 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25209 This alignment is set in the box
25214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25263 for every column as default.
25264 For example, the sequence
25265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25276 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25277 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25278 corresponds to the relevant column.
25279 The result will look like this:
25280 \begin_inset Formula
25283 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25284 column & has & has\,right\\
25285 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25294 \begin_layout Standard
25295 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25298 arg "newline-insert newline"
25301 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25302 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25304 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25307 or the math toolbar.
25310 \begin_layout Standard
25311 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25312 It can be created with the menu
25314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25315 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25317 \begin_inset space ~
25329 Here is an example:
25330 \begin_inset Formula
25344 \begin_layout Standard
25345 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25348 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25351 arg "newline-insert newline"
25355 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25360 arg "newline-insert newline"
25363 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25371 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25372 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25373 A new row is created by every further entry of
25376 arg "newline-insert newline"
25380 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25381 Here is an example:
25382 \begin_inset Formula
25384 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25385 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25390 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25391 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25392 \begin_inset Formula
25394 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25402 \begin_layout Standard
25403 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25410 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25411 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25414 reference "eq:asquared"
25419 The other types are described in section
25420 \begin_inset space ~
25424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25426 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25433 \begin_layout Section
25434 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25435 \begin_inset Index idx
25438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25439 Math ! Formula numbering
25445 \begin_inset Index idx
25448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25449 Math ! Referencing formulas
25455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25457 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25464 \begin_layout Standard
25465 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25467 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25468 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25470 \begin_inset space ~
25474 \begin_inset space ~
25482 arg "math-number-toggle"
25486 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25487 within parentheses.
25488 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25489 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25490 the document class.
25491 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25492 separated by a dot:
25493 \begin_inset Formula
25503 arg "math-number-toggle"
25506 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25507 You can only number displayed formulas.
25510 \begin_layout Standard
25511 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25513 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25514 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25516 \begin_inset space ~
25520 \begin_inset space ~
25528 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25531 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25532 \begin_inset Formula
25535 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25541 To number all lines use the shortcut
25544 arg "math-number-toggle"
25550 \begin_layout Standard
25551 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25554 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25555 A label is inserted with the menu
25557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25566 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25567 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25568 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25580 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25581 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25582 We inserted in the following example the label
25583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25590 in the second line:
25591 \begin_inset Formula
25593 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25594 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25599 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25600 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25601 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25605 \begin_inset space ~
25613 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25617 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25618 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25619 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25620 as the formula number:
25623 \begin_layout Standard
25624 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25627 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25634 \begin_layout Standard
25635 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25636 's cross-reference box are described in section
25637 \begin_inset space ~
25641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25643 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25648 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25656 \begin_layout Section
25657 User defined math macros
25658 \begin_inset Index idx
25661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25670 \begin_layout Standard
25672 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25673 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25674 Math macros are explained in section
25677 \begin_inset space ~
25689 \begin_layout Section
25693 \begin_layout Subsection
25695 \begin_inset Index idx
25698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 \begin_layout Standard
25708 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25709 To set a font in a formula, use the
25712 \begin_inset space ~
25720 arg "math-insert \\font"
25723 , or enter its command, listed in table
25724 \begin_inset space ~
25728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25730 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25737 \begin_layout Standard
25738 \begin_inset Float table
25743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25744 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25749 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25753 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25763 \begin_inset Tabular
25764 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25765 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25766 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25767 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25799 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25826 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25853 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25886 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25913 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25940 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25974 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26001 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26035 \begin_layout Standard
26036 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26044 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26060 \begin_layout Standard
26061 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26062 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26067 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26068 space when you need a space in the box.
26069 Here is an example where
26070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26081 denotes the set of numbers:
26082 \begin_inset Formula
26084 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26092 \begin_layout Standard
26093 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26094 You can, for example, put a character in
26103 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26107 \begin_inset Newline newline
26110 So it is better not to use this feature.
26113 \begin_layout Standard
26114 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26115 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26119 \begin_inset Newline newline
26122 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26128 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26129 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26135 \begin_layout Standard
26142 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26145 \begin_layout Standard
26146 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26148 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26149 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26151 \begin_inset space ~
26159 \begin_layout Subsection
26161 \begin_inset Index idx
26164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26173 \begin_layout Standard
26174 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26176 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26180 \begin_inset space ~
26184 \begin_inset space ~
26192 \begin_inset space ~
26200 arg "math-insert \\font"
26204 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26205 in black instead of blue.
26206 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26207 Here is an example:
26208 \begin_inset Formula
26211 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26212 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26221 \begin_layout Subsection
26223 \begin_inset Index idx
26226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26235 \begin_layout Standard
26236 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26237 automatically chosen in most situations.
26255 For most characters,
26263 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26264 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26269 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26270 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26271 thinks are appropriate.
26272 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26275 arg "math-insert \\style"
26279 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26280 For example, you can set
26281 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26284 , which is normally in
26293 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26297 The four styles are used in the following example:
26300 \begin_layout Standard
26301 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26305 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26309 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26313 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26319 \begin_layout Standard
26320 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26321 is set in a particular size with the menu
26323 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26325 \begin_inset space ~
26330 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26331 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26332 will be adjusted to correspond.
26333 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26344 \begin_layout Standard
26348 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26354 \begin_layout Section
26355 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26357 \begin_inset Index idx
26360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26367 \begin_inset Index idx
26370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26379 \begin_layout Standard
26381 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26382 that are in common use.
26385 \begin_layout Subsection
26386 Enabling AMS-Support
26389 \begin_layout Standard
26390 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26391 the document by selecting the checkbox
26394 \begin_inset space ~
26398 \begin_inset space ~
26402 \begin_inset space ~
26409 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26413 \begin_inset Index idx
26416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26417 Document ! Settings
26425 \begin_inset space ~
26431 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26432 -errors in formulas,
26433 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26436 \begin_layout Subsection
26438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26440 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26445 \begin_inset Index idx
26448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26449 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26457 \begin_layout Standard
26458 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26459 provides a selection of different formula types.
26461 allows you to choose between
26482 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26483 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26489 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26492 \begin_layout Chapter
26496 \begin_layout Section
26498 \begin_inset Index idx
26501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26510 name "sec:Cross-References"
26517 \begin_layout Standard
26518 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26519 's strengths is cross-references.
26520 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26522 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26523 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26524 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26527 \begin_layout Enumerate
26531 \begin_layout Enumerate
26532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26534 name "enu:Second-item"
26541 \begin_layout Enumerate
26545 \begin_layout Standard
26546 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26551 or by pressing the toolbar button
26558 A gray label box like this:
26559 \begin_inset Graphics
26560 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
26565 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26567 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26602 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26603 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26619 \begin_layout Standard
26620 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26625 or the toolbar button
26628 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26632 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26633 \begin_inset Graphics
26634 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26639 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26641 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26654 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26658 \begin_layout Standard
26659 As an alternative to
26661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26664 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26669 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26670 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26672 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26685 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26686 \begin_inset space ~
26690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26692 reference "enu:Second-item"
26699 \begin_layout Standard
26700 It is recommended to use a protected space
26704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26705 described in section
26706 \begin_inset space ~
26710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26712 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26721 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26722 line breaks between them.
26725 \begin_layout Standard
26726 There are six formats of cross-references:
26729 \begin_layout Description
26730 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26733 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26740 \begin_layout Description
26741 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26742 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26754 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26761 \begin_layout Description
26762 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26763 \begin_inset space ~
26767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26768 LatexCommand pageref
26769 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26776 \begin_layout Description
26778 \begin_inset space ~
26782 \begin_inset space ~
26785 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26787 LatexCommand vpageref
26788 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26793 \begin_inset Newline newline
26796 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26797 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26798 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26799 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26800 it prints “on the next page”.
26801 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26804 \begin_layout Description
26806 \begin_inset space ~
26810 \begin_inset space ~
26814 \begin_inset space ~
26817 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26820 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26825 \begin_inset Newline newline
26828 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26834 ; otherwise it behaves like
26838 \begin_inset space ~
26842 \begin_inset space ~
26851 \begin_layout Description
26853 \begin_inset space ~
26856 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26857 \begin_inset Newline newline
26861 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26869 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26879 \begin_inset Index idx
26882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26884 -packages ! prettyref
26890 \begin_inset Index idx
26893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26895 -packages ! refstyle
26906 \begin_inset Newline newline
26909 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26910 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26913 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26918 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26926 is the default and preferred because
26930 supports only English documents.
26931 The format is specified by using the command
26943 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26944 preamble of the document.
26945 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26958 ) can be done with this command
26959 \begin_inset Newline newline
26966 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26971 \begin_inset Newline newline
26974 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26976 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26978 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26985 \begin_layout Description
26987 \begin_inset space ~
26990 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26992 LatexCommand nameref
26993 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27000 \begin_layout Standard
27001 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27002 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27004 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27008 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27012 \begin_layout Standard
27013 You can only use the style
27017 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27021 is always possible.
27024 \begin_layout Standard
27025 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27026 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27028 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27029 \begin_inset space ~
27033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27035 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27042 \begin_layout Standard
27043 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27047 \begin_inset space ~
27051 \begin_inset space ~
27056 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27057 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27060 \begin_inset space ~
27065 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27066 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27069 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27075 \begin_layout Standard
27076 You can change labels at any time.
27077 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27078 do not need to think about this.
27081 \begin_layout Standard
27082 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27084 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27088 \begin_layout Standard
27089 References are described in detail in the section
27090 \begin_inset space ~
27094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27104 \begin_inset space ~
27112 \begin_layout Section
27113 Table of Contents and other Listings
27114 \begin_inset Index idx
27117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27124 \begin_inset Index idx
27127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27143 \begin_layout Subsection
27145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27147 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27154 \begin_layout Standard
27155 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27158 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27160 \begin_inset space ~
27164 \begin_inset space ~
27170 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27172 If you click on it, the
27176 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27177 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27178 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27180 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27182 \begin_inset space ~
27187 that is described in section
27188 \begin_inset space ~
27192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27194 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27201 \begin_layout Standard
27202 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27203 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27205 \begin_inset space ~
27209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27211 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27215 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27217 \begin_inset space ~
27221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27223 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27227 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27229 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27232 \begin_layout Subsection
27233 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27236 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27243 \begin_layout Standard
27244 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27246 You can insert them via the
27248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27252 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27255 \begin_layout Section
27256 URLs and Hyperlinks
27257 \begin_inset Index idx
27260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27267 \begin_inset Index idx
27270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27279 \begin_layout Subsection
27281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27290 \begin_layout Standard
27291 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27293 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27299 \begin_layout Standard
27300 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27302 \begin_inset Flex URL
27305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27315 \begin_layout Standard
27316 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27322 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27326 \begin_layout Standard
27327 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27335 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27344 \begin_layout Subsection
27346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27348 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27355 \begin_layout Standard
27356 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27361 or with the toolbar button
27368 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27377 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27378 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27379 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27381 name "LyX's homepage"
27382 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27386 , an Email address like this:
27387 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27389 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27390 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27395 , or a link to a file.
27398 \begin_layout Standard
27399 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27412 to the link target.
27415 \begin_layout Standard
27416 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27417 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27418 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27419 the text style dialog.
27420 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27426 name "LyX's homepage"
27427 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27434 \begin_layout Standard
27435 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27439 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27442 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27446 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27448 \begin_inset Newline newline
27456 \begin_inset Newline newline
27463 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27466 \begin_layout Section
27468 \begin_inset Index idx
27471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27480 name "sec:Appendices"
27487 \begin_layout Standard
27488 Appendices are created with the menu
27490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27492 \begin_inset space ~
27496 \begin_inset space ~
27502 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27503 as the appendix part of the book.
27504 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27507 \begin_layout Standard
27508 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27509 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27510 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27511 and the subsection number.
27512 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27516 \begin_layout Standard
27518 \begin_inset space ~
27522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27524 reference "chap:Credits"
27529 \begin_inset space ~
27533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27535 reference "subsec:Export"
27542 \begin_layout Section
27544 \begin_inset Index idx
27547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27556 name "sec:Bibliography"
27563 \begin_layout Standard
27564 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27566 You can include a bibliography database,
27570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27571 Known under the name
27572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27575 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27585 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27586 manually, using the paragraph environment
27590 , which was described in section
27591 \begin_inset space ~
27595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27597 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27602 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27603 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27607 use a bibliography database.
27610 \begin_layout Subsection
27611 The Bibliography Environment
27614 \begin_layout Standard
27619 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27621 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27630 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27632 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27642 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27645 \begin_layout Standard
27646 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27651 or the toolbar button
27654 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27658 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27659 containing the available citations.
27660 Select one or more keys from the list and
27670 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27671 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27675 \begin_layout Standard
27676 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27677 entry with surrounding brackets.
27682 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27683 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27695 \begin_layout Standard
27699 Companion Second Edition
27702 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27704 key "latexcompanion"
27711 \begin_layout Standard
27712 The \SpecialChar LyX
27713 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27714 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27724 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27727 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27729 \begin_inset space ~
27737 arg "layout-paragraph"
27741 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27744 \begin_layout Subsection
27745 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27747 \begin_inset Index idx
27750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27751 Bibliography ! Databases
27757 \begin_inset Index idx
27760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27761 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27770 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27777 \begin_layout Standard
27778 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27784 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27786 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27787 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27792 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27794 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27795 your working field in a database.
27796 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27797 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27798 list for that document.
27799 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27803 \begin_layout Standard
27804 The database is a text file with the file extension
27805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27816 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27817 The format is explained in
27818 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27824 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27826 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27828 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27833 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27834 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27835 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27837 \begin_inset Flex URL
27840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27842 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27850 \begin_layout Standard
27851 To use a database, use the menu
27853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27858 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27871 \begin_inset space ~
27877 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27878 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27885 Add bibliography to TOC
27887 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27892 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27893 in the document or just the cited references.
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27897 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27909 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27910 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27911 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27912 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27914 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27920 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27921 \begin_inset Newline newline
27925 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27927 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27939 \begin_layout Standard
27940 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27943 \begin_layout Standard
27944 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27945 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27947 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27955 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27960 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27961 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27962 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27977 The following variants are possible:
27980 \begin_layout Description
27981 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27982 with other bibliography packages (e.
27983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27987 \begin_inset space \space{}
27994 ), only with the package
27998 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
28002 \begin_layout Description
28003 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28004 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28005 with all bibliography packages, except
28010 \begin_layout Description
28011 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
28016 , works with all bibliography packages
28019 \begin_layout Standard
28020 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28021 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
28023 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
28026 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28030 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28039 \begin_layout Standard
28040 When you select the option
28042 Sectioned bibliography
28046 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28047 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28050 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
28051 This and other options are explained in detail in section
28053 Customizing Bibliographies
28057 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28062 Additional Features
28067 \begin_layout Standard
28068 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
28069 the two methods of creating them.
28070 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28071 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28072 We used the style file
28076 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
28079 \begin_layout Subsection
28080 Bibliography layout
28081 \begin_inset Index idx
28084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28085 Bibliography ! Layout
28093 \begin_layout Standard
28094 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
28095 For this feature you need to enable the option
28101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28105 \begin_inset Index idx
28108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28109 Document ! Settings
28119 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
28120 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28121 style files as explained in
28122 the previous section.
28125 \begin_layout Standard
28126 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
28127 the citation reference window.
28128 Here is an example where the text
28129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28133 \begin_inset space ~
28137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28140 appears after the reference:
28143 \begin_layout Standard
28145 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28148 key "latexcompanion"
28155 \begin_layout Section
28157 \begin_inset Index idx
28160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28176 \begin_layout Standard
28177 An index entry is created if you use the menu
28179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28181 \begin_inset space ~
28186 or the toolbar button
28193 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
28194 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
28195 by \SpecialChar LyX
28196 as the index entry.
28199 \begin_layout Standard
28200 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
28202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28203 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28205 \begin_inset space ~
28211 A light blue box labeled
28212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28223 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
28224 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
28228 \begin_layout Standard
28229 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
28230 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
28231 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
28232 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28234 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28236 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
28243 \begin_layout Subsection
28244 Grouping Index Entries
28245 \begin_inset Index idx
28248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28257 \begin_layout Standard
28258 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
28260 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
28261 lists under the entry
28262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28270 First we create the entry
28271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28279 \begin_inset space ~
28283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28285 reference "subsec:Lists"
28290 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
28291 \begin_inset space ~
28295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28297 reference "sec:Itemize"
28301 , we insert the command
28304 \begin_layout Standard
28310 \begin_layout Standard
28314 \begin_layout Standard
28320 \begin_layout Standard
28321 for the enumerated list in section
28322 \begin_inset space ~
28326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28328 reference "sec:Enumerate"
28335 \begin_layout Standard
28336 The exclamation mark
28337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28344 marks the grouping levels.
28345 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
28346 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
28347 If we don't have an index entry for
28348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28355 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
28358 \begin_layout Subsection
28360 \begin_inset Index idx
28363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28364 Index ! Page ranges
28372 \begin_layout Standard
28373 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
28375 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
28376 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
28377 an index entry in section
28378 \begin_inset space ~
28382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28384 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
28391 \begin_layout Standard
28394 Paragraph environments|(
28397 \begin_layout Standard
28398 and another entry at the end of section
28399 \begin_inset space ~
28403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28405 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
28412 \begin_layout Standard
28415 Paragraph environments|)
28418 \begin_layout Standard
28420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28443 respectively start and end the index range.
28444 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28445 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28446 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28447 An example is the index entry
28448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28451 Document ! Settings
28452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28458 \begin_layout Subsection
28460 \begin_inset Index idx
28463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28464 Index ! Cross referencing
28472 \begin_layout Standard
28473 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28474 We referred for example in the index entry
28475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28483 \begin_inset space ~
28487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28489 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28493 ) to the index entry
28494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28501 in the same section using the entry
28504 \begin_layout Standard
28507 GIF|see{Image formats}
28510 \begin_layout Standard
28511 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28513 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28514 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28517 \begin_layout Subsection
28519 \begin_inset Index idx
28522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28523 Index ! Entry order
28531 \begin_layout Standard
28532 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28533 follow the rules for the index order.
28534 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28540 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28542 \begin_inset space ~
28546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28548 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28557 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28558 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28583 \begin_inset Index idx
28586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28587 Dummy entries ! maïs
28593 \begin_inset Index idx
28596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28597 Dummy entries ! maître
28603 \begin_inset Index idx
28606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28607 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28612 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28613 maïs, maison, maître.
28614 To achieve this, we use the command
28617 \begin_layout Standard
28620 previous entry@current entry
28623 \begin_layout Standard
28624 In our case we want to have
28625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28640 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28643 \begin_layout Standard
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28651 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28653 See the next subsection for an example.
28656 \begin_layout Standard
28657 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28663 \begin_layout Standard
28664 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28669 to generate the index (see sec.
28670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28676 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28685 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28686 -package aeguill in sec.
28687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28693 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28697 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28698 -packages although all these index
28699 commands start with
28700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28713 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28718 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28721 \begin_layout Standard
28733 \begin_layout Standard
28745 \begin_layout Subsection
28747 \begin_inset Index idx
28750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28751 Index ! Entry layout
28759 \begin_layout Standard
28760 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28761 \begin_inset Index idx
28764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28767 This is an italic dummy entry
28772 You can also format the page number using the character
28773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28781 -command without a backslash.
28782 We can write for example
28785 \begin_layout Standard
28788 italic page number:|textit
28791 \begin_layout Standard
28792 to get the page number in italic.
28793 \begin_inset Index idx
28796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28797 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28802 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28803 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28821 \begin_inset space ~
28827 Have a look at section
28828 \begin_inset space ~
28832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28834 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28838 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28842 \begin_layout Standard
28843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28851 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28855 to generate the index, see sec.
28856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28862 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28871 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28876 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28877 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28880 key "latexcompanion"
28892 \begin_layout Standard
28893 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28895 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28896 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28897 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28898 If so, put the following in the preamble
28901 \begin_layout Standard
28913 \begin_layout Standard
28917 \begin_layout Standard
28923 \begin_layout Standard
28924 in the index entry.
28925 \begin_inset Index idx
28928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28929 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28934 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28935 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28936 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28939 \begin_layout Standard
28940 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28941 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28942 a bold font for all index entries.
28943 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28955 documentation for details,
28956 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28958 key "makeindex,xindy"
28965 \begin_layout Subsection
28967 \begin_inset Index idx
28970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28979 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28986 \begin_layout Standard
28987 If the index generation program
28991 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28992 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28996 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28997 distribution, is used.
29001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29006 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
29007 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
29008 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
29009 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
29010 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
29020 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
29022 dialog, see section
29023 \begin_inset space ~
29027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29029 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29034 The available options are listed and explained in
29035 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29037 key "makeindex,xindy"
29042 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
29046 \begin_layout Standard
29047 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
29048 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
29051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29052 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29056 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
29057 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
29060 \begin_layout Subsection
29064 \begin_layout Standard
29065 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
29066 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
29067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29074 next to the standard index.
29076 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
29077 that add this feature.
29084 \begin_inset Index idx
29087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29089 -packages ! splitidx
29094 package to generate multiple indexes.
29095 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
29100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29101 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
29103 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29110 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29111 style, but it also includes
29112 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
29113 Please consult the package's manual for details.
29121 \begin_layout Standard
29122 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
29123 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
29125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29129 and select the option
29131 Use multiple Indexes
29138 already contains the standard index
29139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29147 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
29148 also appear as a heading) to the
29152 input field and press the
29157 The new index now also appears in the list.
29158 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
29159 label color to the new index.
29162 \begin_layout Standard
29163 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
29166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29173 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
29174 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
29175 are additional features:
29178 \begin_layout Itemize
29179 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
29180 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
29183 \begin_layout Itemize
29184 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
29185 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
29186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29193 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
29194 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
29195 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
29196 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
29199 \begin_layout Section
29200 Nomenclature/Glossary
29201 \begin_inset Index idx
29204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29211 \begin_inset Index idx
29214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29245 name "sec:Nomenclature"
29252 \begin_layout Standard
29253 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
29254 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
29255 called nomenclature or glossary.
29258 \begin_layout Standard
29259 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29266 \begin_inset Index idx
29269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29271 -packages ! nomencl
29277 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
29279 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29285 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29289 \begin_layout Standard
29290 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
29291 and then use the menu
29293 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29299 \begin_inset space ~
29304 or the toolbar button
29307 arg "nomencl-insert"
29312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29323 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
29326 \begin_layout Standard
29327 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
29328 The first is the term or
29332 that you wish to define.
29337 of the term or symbol.
29340 \begin_layout Standard
29341 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29349 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
29350 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
29358 \begin_layout Subsection
29359 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
29360 \begin_inset Index idx
29363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29364 Nomenclature ! Layout
29372 \begin_layout Standard
29373 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
29377 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29384 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29392 \begin_inset Newline newline
29400 \begin_inset Newline newline
29406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29413 character starts/ends the formula.
29414 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29415 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
29417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29427 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
29437 \begin_layout Standard
29438 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29439 -syntax is given in section
29440 \begin_inset space ~
29444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29446 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29453 \begin_layout Standard
29457 \begin_inset space ~
29462 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29464 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29469 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29476 in this document is:
29477 \begin_inset Newline newline
29482 dummy entry for the character
29487 \begin_inset Newline newline
29499 \begin_inset space ~
29509 font use the command
29538 \begin_layout Standard
29539 If the characters |
29540 \begin_inset space \space{}
29544 \begin_inset space \space{}
29548 \begin_inset space \space{}
29552 \begin_inset space \space{}
29556 \begin_inset space \space{}
29559 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29560 a quote character in front of them.
29561 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29562 LatexCommand nomenclature
29563 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29564 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29571 \begin_layout Subsection
29572 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29573 \begin_inset Index idx
29576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29577 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29585 \begin_layout Standard
29586 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29587 -code of the symbol
29589 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29591 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29594 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29595 LatexCommand nomenclature
29597 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29604 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29608 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29609 LatexCommand nomenclature
29612 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29617 They will be sorted by
29618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29644 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29647 will be sorted before the
29651 since the character
29652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29659 is considered in sorting.
29662 \begin_layout Standard
29663 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29666 \begin_inset space ~
29671 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29672 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29674 For the example given, you can insert
29678 in this field for the
29679 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29686 will be located before
29687 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29693 \begin_layout Standard
29694 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29699 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29708 \begin_layout Subsection
29709 Nomenclature Options
29710 \begin_inset Index idx
29713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29714 Nomenclature ! Options
29722 \begin_layout Standard
29727 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29728 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29731 \begin_layout Description
29732 refeq Appends the phrase
29733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29748 to every nomenclature entry, where
29754 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29757 \begin_layout Description
29758 refpage Appends the phrase
29759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29774 to every nomenclature entry, where
29780 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29783 \begin_layout Description
29784 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29787 \begin_layout Standard
29788 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29789 class options list in the
29791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29795 In this document the options
29802 \begin_layout Standard
29803 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29809 \begin_layout Standard
29810 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29811 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29816 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29819 \begin_layout Description
29829 \begin_layout Description
29832 nomrefpage Like the
29839 \begin_layout Description
29842 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29851 \begin_layout Description
29855 \begin_inset space ~
29861 \begin_inset space ~
29866 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29869 \begin_layout Standard
29871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29878 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29879 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29883 \begin_layout Standard
29891 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29894 \begin_inset Newline newline
29901 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29906 \begin_inset Newline newline
29910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29925 by their translation.
29928 \begin_layout Subsection
29929 Printing the Nomenclature
29930 \begin_inset Index idx
29933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29934 Nomenclature ! Printing
29942 \begin_layout Standard
29943 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29946 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29962 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29963 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29964 You can choose between these settings:
29967 \begin_layout Description
29968 Default a space of 1
29969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29975 \begin_layout Description
29977 \begin_inset space ~
29981 \begin_inset space ~
29984 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29987 \begin_layout Description
29988 Custom custom space
29991 \begin_layout Standard
29992 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30001 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
30009 For example, in order to change the name to
30013 , add the following line to the preamble:
30016 \begin_layout Standard
30024 nomname}{List of Symbols}
30027 \begin_layout Subsection
30028 Nomenclature Program
30029 \begin_inset Index idx
30032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30033 Nomenclature ! Program
30039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30041 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
30048 \begin_layout Standard
30054 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30055 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
30057 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
30062 by adding options, see section
30063 \begin_inset space ~
30067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30069 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30074 The available options are listed and explained in
30075 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30077 key "nomencl,makeindex"
30084 \begin_layout Section
30086 \begin_inset Index idx
30089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30096 \begin_inset Index idx
30099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30100 Document ! Branches
30106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30108 name "sec:Branches"
30115 \begin_layout Standard
30116 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
30117 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
30118 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
30119 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
30122 \begin_layout Standard
30123 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
30124 allows you to put text into branches.
30125 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
30126 To create a branch, either select the menu
30128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30129 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
30132 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
30134 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30141 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
30142 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
30143 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
30144 and whether the name of the branch should
30145 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
30146 (see below for an example).
30147 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
30148 to the name of the other) and to add
30149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30161 \begin_inset space ~
30164 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
30165 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
30168 \begin_layout Standard
30169 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
30170 These boxes are inserted via the menu
30172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30175 where you can choose a branch.
30176 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
30180 \begin_layout Standard
30181 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
30182 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
30185 \begin_layout Standard
30186 \begin_inset Branch Question
30189 \begin_layout Standard
30190 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
30198 \begin_layout Standard
30199 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30202 \begin_layout Standard
30203 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
30211 \begin_layout Standard
30218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30222 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
30223 Consider for example a file
30224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30231 which has the above branches.
30233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30240 is active, the PDF export file would be called
30241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30264 branch were inactive,
30265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30280 branch was active, likewise
30281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30296 branch was active, and
30297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30300 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
30301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30304 if both branches were active.
30305 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
30308 \begin_layout Standard
30309 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30315 \begin_layout Standard
30316 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
30317 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
30318 definitions for each branch.
30319 For example you can define for the question branch
30323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30324 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30325 -syntax, see section
30326 \begin_inset space ~
30330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30332 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30344 \begin_layout Standard
30354 \begin_layout Standard
30364 \begin_layout Standard
30365 and for the answer branch
30368 \begin_layout Standard
30378 \begin_layout Standard
30388 \begin_layout Standard
30389 \begin_inset Branch Question
30392 \begin_layout Standard
30396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30424 \begin_layout Standard
30425 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30428 \begin_layout Standard
30432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30460 \begin_layout Standard
30461 Now it is possible to use the
30465 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30472 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30475 commands to obtain conditional output.
30476 Here is an example formula where only the
30483 \begin_inset Formula
30485 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30493 \begin_layout Standard
30494 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30502 \begin_layout Standard
30503 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30509 \begin_inset space \space{}
30512 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30514 For this advanced usage, see the
30519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30522 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30529 \begin_layout Section
30531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30533 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30538 \begin_inset Index idx
30541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30550 \begin_layout Standard
30553 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30554 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30557 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30559 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30565 \begin_inset Index idx
30568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30570 -packages ! hyperref
30575 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30576 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30577 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30578 part of the document.
30582 \begin_layout Standard
30583 The header information in the dialog tab
30587 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30588 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30589 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30590 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30594 \begin_inset space ~
30598 \begin_inset space ~
30603 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30604 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30605 and author entries.
30609 \begin_inset space ~
30613 \begin_inset space ~
30617 \begin_inset space ~
30622 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30625 \begin_layout Standard
30626 You can specify in the dialog tab
30630 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30635 \begin_inset space ~
30639 \begin_inset space ~
30643 \begin_inset space ~
30648 option allows long links to be split;
30651 \begin_inset space ~
30655 \begin_inset space ~
30659 \begin_inset space ~
30667 \begin_inset space ~
30672 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30675 \begin_inset space ~
30680 colors the different links.
30681 The default colors are:
30684 \begin_layout Labeling
30685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30690 for hyperlinks and URLs
30693 \begin_layout Labeling
30694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30702 \begin_layout Labeling
30703 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30711 \begin_layout Standard
30712 but you can change these in the field
30717 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30720 \begin_layout Standard
30723 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30726 \begin_layout Standard
30731 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30732 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30733 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30736 \begin_layout Standard
30741 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30742 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30743 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30753 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30754 when opening the PDF.
30756 \begin_inset space ~
30759 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30760 \begin_inset space ~
30763 1 will only display the sections.
30766 \begin_layout Standard
30767 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30768 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30774 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30775 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30784 \begin_layout Section
30786 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30790 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30797 \begin_layout Subsection
30800 \begin_inset Index idx
30803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30813 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30820 \begin_layout Standard
30821 As \SpecialChar LyX
30822 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30823 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30824 commands and constructs,
30827 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30828 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30829 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30830 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30831 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30832 cannot support all packages and
30836 \begin_layout Standard
30837 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30838 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30839 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30843 Code box is created by the menu
30845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30858 \begin_inset space ~
30863 or by the toolbar button
30876 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30884 \begin_layout Standard
30885 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30887 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30889 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30890 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30897 , you can write the command part
30903 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30904 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30908 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30909 Code box behind the word.
30910 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30911 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30916 \begin_inset Graphics
30917 filename clipart/ERT.png
30925 \begin_layout Standard
30929 \begin_layout Standard
30930 This is a line with a
30934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30957 \begin_layout Standard
30958 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30966 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30967 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30968 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30969 know that the command is finished.
30977 \begin_layout Subsection
30978 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30980 \begin_inset Argument 1
30983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30984 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30991 \begin_inset Index idx
30994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31004 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31011 \begin_layout Standard
31012 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
31013 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31014 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
31015 uses in the background.
31016 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
31017 is based on commands, you can
31018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31026 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
31027 any time if you know the right commands.
31028 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
31029 is the end of the day.
31030 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
31031 all caption labels bold.
31032 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
31034 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
31038 \begin_layout Standard
31039 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
31041 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31043 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31046 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31055 \begin_layout Standard
31056 As result you find that the package
31061 \begin_inset Index idx
31064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31066 -packages ! caption
31072 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
31074 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31077 \SpecialChar menuseparator
31084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31092 \begin_inset space ~
31100 \begin_layout Standard
31105 usepackage[options]{package name}
31108 \begin_layout Standard
31109 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
31110 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
31111 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
31112 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
31115 \begin_layout Standard
31116 In your case the package name is
31121 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
31126 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
31127 So you add the command
31130 \begin_layout Standard
31135 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
31138 \begin_layout Standard
31139 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
31143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31144 For more commands provided by the
31148 package, have a look at its documentation,
31149 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31163 \begin_layout Standard
31164 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
31166 For example if you use a
31170 class, you don't need the package
31174 , you can instead write
31177 \begin_layout Standard
31182 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
31187 \begin_layout Standard
31188 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
31189 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
31190 documentation of the document class you want to use.
31197 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
31200 \begin_layout Standard
31201 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
31202 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
31204 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31205 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
31206 Code box as described in the previous
31210 \begin_layout Standard
31211 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31212 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31215 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31217 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
31224 \begin_layout Standard
31225 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
31231 \begin_layout Standard
31235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31245 \begin_inset Note Note
31248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31249 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
31257 \begin_layout Left Header
31258 \begin_inset Argument 1
31261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31281 \begin_inset Note Note
31284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31285 defines the header line as described below
31293 \begin_layout Center Header
31294 \begin_inset Argument 1
31297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31306 \begin_layout Right Header
31307 \begin_inset Argument 1
31310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31331 \begin_layout Left Footer
31332 \begin_inset Argument 1
31335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31356 \begin_layout Center Footer
31357 \begin_inset Argument 1
31360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31372 \begin_inset Newline newline
31376 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31382 \begin_layout Right Footer
31383 \begin_inset Argument 1
31386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31408 \begin_layout Section
31409 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31412 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31417 \begin_inset Index idx
31420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31421 Document ! Header/Footer line
31427 \begin_inset Index idx
31430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31439 \begin_layout Standard
31440 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31444 \begin_inset space ~
31455 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31461 \begin_inset space ~
31467 As a second step add in the menu
31469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31470 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31477 Custom Header/Footerlines
31478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31482 This module offers the following 6
31483 \begin_inset space ~
31489 \begin_layout Description
31491 \begin_inset space ~
31495 \begin_inset space ~
31499 \begin_inset space ~
31503 \begin_inset space ~
31507 \begin_inset space ~
31513 \begin_layout Description
31515 \begin_inset space ~
31519 \begin_inset space ~
31523 \begin_inset space ~
31527 \begin_inset space ~
31531 \begin_inset space ~
31537 \begin_layout Standard
31538 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31541 \begin_layout Standard
31542 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31543 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31545 \begin_inset space ~
31549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31551 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31555 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31558 \begin_layout Standard
31559 \begin_inset Float figure
31565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31568 \begin_inset Tabular
31569 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31570 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31571 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31572 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31573 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31575 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31593 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31604 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31622 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31633 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31637 The normal text on the page goes here.
31638 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31640 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31641 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31646 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31655 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31666 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31684 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31713 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31731 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31736 name "fig:Page-layout"
31740 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31753 \begin_layout Standard
31754 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31762 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31766 \begin_inset space ~
31771 is set to “Default”.
31772 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31781 \begin_layout Subsection
31785 \begin_layout Standard
31786 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31787 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31788 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31789 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31791 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31792 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31795 \begin_layout Standard
31796 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31797 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31814 \begin_inset space ~
31822 \begin_layout Description
31825 thepage prints the current page number
31828 \begin_layout Description
31831 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31834 \begin_layout Description
31837 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31840 \begin_layout Description
31843 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31844 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31851 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31854 because it usually goes in a left header.
31857 \begin_layout Description
31860 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31861 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31863 It is normally used in the right header.
31866 \begin_layout Subsection
31867 Default header/footer
31870 \begin_layout Standard
31871 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31872 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31873 footer has the page number.
31874 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31875 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31876 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31879 \begin_inset space ~
31887 \begin_layout Subsection
31891 \begin_layout Standard
31892 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31893 Some pages are different.
31894 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31895 a new part or chapter in your book.
31896 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31897 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31898 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31902 Header and footer decoration line
31905 \begin_layout Standard
31906 By default, you get a 0.4
31907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31910 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31911 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31923 in the following way:
31926 \begin_layout Standard
31933 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31936 \begin_layout Standard
31937 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31946 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31953 \begin_layout Standard
31954 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31956 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31957 \begin_inset space ~
31961 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31970 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31971 Several header/footer lines
31974 \begin_layout Standard
31975 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31976 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31977 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31979 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31995 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32008 \begin_inset space ~
32016 \begin_layout Standard
32023 headheight}{height}
32026 \begin_layout Standard
32027 where height is a size in standard units.
32028 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
32029 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
32030 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32031 logfile with the menu
32033 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32051 \begin_inset space ~
32056 to see if you can find a warning about the package
32061 \begin_inset Index idx
32064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32066 -packages ! fancyhdr
32072 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
32073 for your header/footer.
32076 \begin_layout Subsection
32080 \begin_layout Standard
32081 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
32082 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
32083 This example consists of the following definition:
32086 \begin_layout Description
32088 \begin_inset space ~
32097 , empty optional argument
32100 \begin_layout Description
32102 \begin_inset space ~
32105 Header empty, empty optional argument
32108 \begin_layout Description
32110 \begin_inset space ~
32119 in the optional argument
32122 \begin_layout Description
32124 \begin_inset space ~
32133 in the optional argument
32136 \begin_layout Description
32138 \begin_inset space ~
32151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32155 \begin_inset Newline newline
32159 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32166 in the optional argument
32169 \begin_layout Description
32171 \begin_inset space ~
32180 , empty optional argument
32183 \begin_layout Description
32186 headrulewidth set to 2
32187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32193 \begin_layout Standard
32194 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
32195 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
32201 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32210 \begin_layout Standard
32211 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32217 \begin_layout Standard
32221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32225 pagestyle{headings}
32231 \begin_inset Note Note
32234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32235 switches back to page style with the default headings
32243 \begin_layout Section
32244 Previewing Snippets of your Document
32245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32247 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
32252 \begin_inset Index idx
32255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32262 \begin_inset Index idx
32265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32274 \begin_layout Standard
32276 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
32277 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
32278 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
32281 \begin_layout Subsection
32285 \begin_layout Standard
32286 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32292 \begin_inset Index idx
32295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32297 -packages ! preview-latex
32302 (on some systems named simply
32307 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32309 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32315 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32317 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
32325 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
32326 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32327 -package are automatically
32328 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
32332 \begin_layout Subsection
32336 \begin_layout Standard
32337 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32338 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32340 activate the option
32343 \begin_inset space ~
32350 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32356 \begin_inset space ~
32360 \begin_inset space ~
32363 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
32370 \begin_inset space ~
32383 \begin_inset space ~
32388 is the multiplication factor for the size.
32391 \begin_layout Standard
32392 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32397 \begin_inset space ~
32405 \begin_inset space ~
32413 \begin_layout Standard
32414 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32415 and when you finish
32419 \begin_layout Standard
32420 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32428 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32429 generated by activating the option
32432 \begin_inset space ~
32438 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32446 \begin_layout Subsection
32447 Selected document parts
32450 \begin_layout Standard
32451 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32452 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32453 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32454 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32456 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32462 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32463 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32464 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32467 \begin_layout Standard
32468 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32475 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32487 is explained in section
32489 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32494 \begin_inset space ~
32504 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32505 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32506 the final rotated boxes,
32507 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32508 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32510 Here is the result:
32513 \begin_layout Standard
32514 \begin_inset Preview
32516 \begin_layout Standard
32521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32525 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32531 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32541 height_special "totalheight"
32546 backgroundcolor "none"
32549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32574 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32580 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32602 \begin_layout Standard
32603 Previewing works also for colors.
32604 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32623 is explained in section
32630 \begin_inset space ~
32643 \begin_layout Standard
32644 \begin_inset Preview
32646 \begin_layout Standard
32650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32669 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32674 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32693 \begin_layout Standard
32694 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32700 \begin_layout Standard
32701 If \SpecialChar LyX
32702 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32703 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32704 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32705 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32706 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32707 the \SpecialChar TeX
32709 If \SpecialChar LyX
32710 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32711 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32713 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32714 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32715 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32718 \begin_layout Subsection
32723 \begin_layout Standard
32724 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32725 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32728 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32730 \begin_inset space ~
32735 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32737 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32739 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32740 's main window, then only this selection
32741 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32742 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32743 the source view window.
32748 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32749 ; but note that if you have
32750 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32752 not just the one which is open at the time.
32755 \begin_layout Section
32756 Advanced Find and Replace
32757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32759 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32764 \begin_inset Index idx
32767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32774 \begin_inset Index idx
32777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32786 \begin_layout Subsection
32790 \begin_layout Standard
32791 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32792 allows for searching of complex,
32793 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32795 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32796 The key-features are:
32799 \begin_layout Itemize
32800 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32801 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32802 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32806 \begin_layout Itemize
32807 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32808 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32809 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32810 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32813 \begin_layout Itemize
32814 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32815 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32816 outside of mathematics environments
32819 \begin_layout Itemize
32820 Search may be widened to a specific
32825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32829 \begin_inset space ~
32832 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32833 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32840 \begin_layout Itemize
32841 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32842 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32847 \begin_inset space ~
32850 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32853 \begin_layout Subsection
32857 \begin_layout Standard
32858 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32860 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32873 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32876 ) or the toolbar button
32879 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32885 Advanced Find and Replace
32890 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32894 \begin_layout Standard
32900 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32904 \begin_inset space ~
32909 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32912 arg "paragraph-break"
32916 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32917 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32921 arg "paragraph-break"
32924 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32928 searches backwards.
32931 \begin_layout Standard
32935 \begin_inset space ~
32940 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32949 \begin_inset space ~
32954 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32958 Searching for mathematics
32961 \begin_layout Standard
32962 Mathematical formulas, such as
32963 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32966 or something more complex like
32967 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32970 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32975 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32976 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32977 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32978 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32988 \begin_layout Standard
32989 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32990 This is done by switching to the
32994 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32999 This way, entering in the
33006 \begin_layout Itemize
33007 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
33008 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
33011 \begin_layout Itemize
33012 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
33013 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
33016 \begin_layout Itemize
33017 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
33018 of it only within section headings.
33019 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
33020 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
33024 \begin_layout Itemize
33025 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
33026 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
33029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33033 \begin_layout Standard
33034 The entries made in the
33038 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
33041 \begin_inset space ~
33047 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
33051 button or alternatively press
33054 arg "paragraph-break"
33061 while the cursor is in the
33064 \begin_inset space ~
33072 \begin_layout Standard
33073 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
33075 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
33079 \begin_layout Itemize
33080 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
33081 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
33082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33089 with its typewriter version
33090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33104 \begin_layout Itemize
33105 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
33107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33111 \begin_inset Formula $R$
33115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33123 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
33127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33130 (you may want to enable the
33133 \begin_inset space ~
33141 \begin_inset space ~
33146 options and disable the
33154 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
33155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33162 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
33163 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
33167 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
33170 , or occurrences of
33171 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
33175 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
33181 \begin_layout Subsection
33185 \begin_layout Standard
33186 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
33190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33191 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
33193 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33195 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
33204 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
33210 This is done with the context menu
33212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33213 Insert Regular Expression
33215 while the cursor is in the
33220 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
33221 expression matching rules
33225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33226 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
33229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33233 \begin_inset space ~
33236 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
33237 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
33243 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
33244 same text in the document.
33245 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
33246 Examples of using such a feature may be:
33249 \begin_layout Enumerate
33250 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
33255 editor the fraction
33256 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
33260 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33263 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
33264 fractions with the given denominator.
33267 \begin_layout Enumerate
33268 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
33280 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33285 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
33286 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
33287 Also, by inserting a
33288 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33291 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
33292 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
33295 \begin_layout Standard
33296 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
33297 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
33298 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33301 , and referring back to them through
33302 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33306 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
33310 For example, try searching with the regexp
33311 \begin_inset Newline newline
33314 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
33317 \begin_inset Newline newline
33320 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
33323 \begin_layout Standard
33324 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
33327 \begin_layout Standard
33328 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33336 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
33337 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
33338 sub-expressions is absolute.
33340 \begin_inset space ~
33344 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33347 always refers to the first occurrence of
33348 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33351 in all entered regexps.
33359 \begin_layout Section
33361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33363 name "sec:Spellchecking"
33368 \begin_inset Index idx
33371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33380 \begin_layout Standard
33382 has a built-in spell checker.
33385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33392 key or the toolbar button
33395 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
33398 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
33399 beginning of the currently selected text.
33400 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
33401 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
33402 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
33403 scrolled so that it is visible.
33404 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
33405 n, if any could be found.
33406 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
33410 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33411 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33414 \begin_layout Standard
33415 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33418 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33422 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33423 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33425 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33426 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33429 \begin_inset space ~
33437 arg "dialog-show character"
33440 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33442 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33445 \begin_layout Standard
33446 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33447 can be downloaded from here:
33448 \begin_inset Newline newline
33452 \begin_inset Flex URL
33455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33457 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33463 \begin_inset Newline newline
33467 \begin_inset space ~
33470 files for each language.
33471 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33472 \begin_inset space ~
33475 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33476 's installation subfolder
33484 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33486 \begin_inset Newline newline
33489 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33490 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33491 but in most cases these are
33507 is the language code.
33510 \begin_layout Subsection
33514 \begin_layout Standard
33517 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33518 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33520 \begin_inset space ~
33523 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33526 you can set the following things:
33529 \begin_layout Description
33531 \begin_inset space ~
33534 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33535 should use for spell checking.
33536 Depending on your platform,
33550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33551 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33552 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33567 \begin_layout Description
33569 \begin_inset space ~
33572 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33573 will always use the given language
33574 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33577 \begin_layout Description
33579 \begin_inset space ~
33582 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33588 \begin_inset space \space{}
33592 This should normally not be needed.
33595 \begin_layout Description
33597 \begin_inset space ~
33601 \begin_inset space ~
33604 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33616 \begin_layout Description
33618 \begin_inset space ~
33621 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33622 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33623 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33624 appear in a context menu.
33625 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33629 \begin_layout Description
33631 \begin_inset space ~
33635 \begin_inset space ~
33639 \begin_inset space ~
33642 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33646 \begin_layout Section
33648 \begin_inset Index idx
33651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33660 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33667 \begin_layout Standard
33669 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33670 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33680 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33682 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33691 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33693 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33694 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33695 which are available for many languages.
33698 \begin_layout Standard
33699 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33700 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33704 \begin_layout Subsection
33705 Setting up the thesaurus
33708 \begin_layout Standard
33717 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33721 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33726 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33732 \begin_inset space ~
33740 For instance, the US English files are named:
33743 \begin_layout Itemize
33747 \begin_layout Itemize
33751 \begin_layout Standard
33760 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33761 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33764 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33765 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33766 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33768 \begin_inset space ~
33773 ) to the path where they are installed.
33777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33778 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33779 ies, typical locations are
33785 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33789 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33793 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33796 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33802 LibreOffice-<Version>
33809 On the Mac, the default location is
33811 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33812 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33813 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33814 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33815 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33816 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33824 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33825 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33826 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33830 \begin_layout Standard
33831 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33832 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33836 \begin_layout Itemize
33837 \begin_inset Flex URL
33840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33842 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33850 \begin_layout Standard
33851 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33852 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33854 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33855 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33856 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33858 \begin_inset space ~
33863 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33865 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33866 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33870 \begin_layout Standard
33871 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33873 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33876 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33882 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33885 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33886 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33894 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33895 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33896 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33898 \begin_inset space ~
33903 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33906 \begin_layout Subsection
33907 Using the thesaurus
33910 \begin_layout Standard
33911 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33913 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33916 or the toolbar button
33919 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33922 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33924 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33926 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33927 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33928 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33937 ), related terms (such as
33940 \begin_inset space ~
33949 ), compounds (such as
33952 \begin_inset space ~
33961 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33970 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33973 \begin_layout Standard
33974 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33975 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33979 \begin_layout Standard
33980 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33981 the dictionary, such as the above
33985 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33990 \begin_inset space \space{}
33993 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33994 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33995 For example, looking up the word form
33999 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
34004 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
34005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34009 \begin_inset space \space{}
34020 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
34021 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
34022 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
34025 \begin_layout Section
34027 \begin_inset Index idx
34030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34037 \begin_inset Index idx
34040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34041 Document ! Change Tracking
34047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34049 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
34056 \begin_layout Standard
34057 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
34058 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
34059 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
34060 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
34062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34064 \begin_inset space ~
34067 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34069 \begin_inset space ~
34077 \begin_layout Standard
34078 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
34092 The color depends on the author that made the change.
34093 You can change the color in
34095 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34096 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34098 \begin_inset space ~
34102 \begin_inset space ~
34107 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34113 \begin_inset Index idx
34116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34117 Color ! Change tracking
34122 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
34123 's status bar when the
34124 cursor is in changed text.
34125 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
34128 arg "changes-merge"
34134 \begin_layout Standard
34135 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
34137 \begin_inset Index idx
34140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34149 \begin_layout Standard
34150 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34156 \begin_layout Standard
34157 \begin_inset Graphics
34158 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34167 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34173 \begin_layout Standard
34174 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
34177 \begin_layout Standard
34178 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34184 \begin_layout Standard
34185 \begin_inset Tabular
34186 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
34187 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
34188 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34189 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34199 arg "changes-track"
34207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34213 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34215 \begin_inset space ~
34218 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34220 \begin_inset space ~
34229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34238 arg "changes-output"
34246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34252 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34254 \begin_inset space ~
34257 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34259 \begin_inset space ~
34263 \begin_inset space ~
34267 \begin_inset space ~
34276 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34297 Jumps to the next change
34303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34312 arg "change-accept"
34320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34326 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34328 \begin_inset space ~
34331 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34333 \begin_inset space ~
34342 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34351 arg "change-reject"
34359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34367 \begin_inset space ~
34370 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34372 \begin_inset space ~
34381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34390 arg "changes-merge"
34398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34404 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34406 \begin_inset space ~
34409 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34411 \begin_inset space ~
34420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34429 arg "all-changes-accept"
34437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34445 \begin_inset space ~
34448 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34450 \begin_inset space ~
34454 \begin_inset space ~
34463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34472 arg "all-changes-reject"
34480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34488 \begin_inset space ~
34491 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34493 \begin_inset space ~
34497 \begin_inset space ~
34506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34529 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34530 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34543 \begin_inset space ~
34552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34575 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34577 \begin_inset space ~
34593 \begin_layout Standard
34594 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34600 \begin_layout Standard
34601 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34622 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34623 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34624 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34625 the next change after the current cursor position.
34626 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34627 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34628 step to the next change.
34629 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34632 \begin_layout Standard
34633 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34634 to describe a change.
34637 \begin_layout Standard
34638 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34644 \begin_inset Index idx
34647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34649 -packages ! dvipost
34655 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34657 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34663 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34667 \begin_layout Section
34668 Comparison of Documents
34669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34671 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34676 \begin_inset Index idx
34679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34680 Comparison of documents
34688 \begin_layout Standard
34689 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34692 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34696 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34697 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34699 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34701 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34709 \begin_inset space ~
34713 \begin_inset space ~
34722 \begin_inset space ~
34726 \begin_inset space ~
34730 \begin_inset space ~
34734 \begin_inset space ~
34738 \begin_inset space ~
34742 \begin_inset space ~
34747 enables the change tracking option
34750 \begin_inset space ~
34754 \begin_inset space ~
34758 \begin_inset space ~
34763 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34766 \begin_layout Section
34767 International Support
34768 \begin_inset Index idx
34771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34772 International support
34780 \begin_layout Standard
34781 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34782 with any language you want.
34783 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34784 up \SpecialChar LyX
34786 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34788 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34795 \begin_layout Standard
34796 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34797 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34798 \begin_inset space ~
34802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34804 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34811 \begin_layout Subsection
34813 \begin_inset Index idx
34816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34823 \begin_inset Index idx
34826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34827 Document ! Settings
34833 \begin_inset Index idx
34836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34837 Document ! Language
34845 \begin_layout Standard
34848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34849 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34852 dialog lets you set
34854 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34859 \begin_layout Standard
34864 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34869 \begin_inset space ~
34874 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34875 For details about the different encoding options see section
34876 \begin_inset space ~
34880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34882 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34889 \begin_layout Subsection
34890 Keyboard mapping configuration
34891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34893 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34900 \begin_layout Standard
34901 If you have for example a U.
34902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34905 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34906 can use an alternate keymap.
34907 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34912 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34913 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34914 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34917 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34918 \begin_inset space ~
34922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34924 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34929 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34930 which one you want to use.
34933 \begin_layout Standard
34934 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34935 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34936 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34940 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34941 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34942 one to support the characters you want.
34943 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34950 \begin_layout Chapter
34953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34955 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34962 \begin_layout Standard
34963 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34964 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34965 topic inside the user's guide.
34968 \begin_layout Section
34970 \begin_inset Index idx
34973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34982 \begin_layout Standard
34987 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34990 \begin_layout Subsection
34994 \begin_layout Standard
34995 Creates a new document.
34998 \begin_layout Subsection
35002 \begin_layout Standard
35003 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
35004 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
35005 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
35008 \begin_layout Subsection
35012 \begin_layout Standard
35016 \begin_layout Subsection
35020 \begin_layout Standard
35021 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
35022 Click there on a file to open it.
35025 \begin_layout Subsection
35029 \begin_layout Standard
35030 Closes the current document.
35033 \begin_layout Subsection
35037 \begin_layout Standard
35038 Closes all opened documents.
35041 \begin_layout Subsection
35045 \begin_layout Standard
35046 Saves the actual document.
35049 \begin_layout Subsection
35053 \begin_layout Standard
35054 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
35057 \begin_layout Subsection
35061 \begin_layout Standard
35062 Saves all opened documents.
35065 \begin_layout Subsection
35069 \begin_layout Standard
35070 Reloads the actual document from disk.
35073 \begin_layout Subsection
35077 \begin_layout Standard
35078 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
35079 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
35080 It is described in the section
35082 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
35087 Additional Features
35092 \begin_layout Subsection
35096 \begin_layout Standard
35097 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
35098 -versions, HTML-files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
35099 -files, NoWeb-files,
35100 plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
35101 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
35105 \begin_layout Standard
35106 When using the menu entry
35109 \begin_inset space ~
35114 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
35118 \begin_inset space ~
35122 \begin_inset space ~
35126 \begin_inset space ~
35131 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
35132 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
35135 \begin_layout Subsection
35137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35139 name "subsec:Export"
35146 \begin_layout Standard
35147 You can export your document to various file formats.
35148 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
35150 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
35151 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
35152 during its configuration.
35155 \begin_layout Standard
35156 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
35158 \begin_inset space ~
35162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35164 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
35171 \begin_layout Description
35177 \begin_inset space ~
35184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35191 yX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
35193 \begin_inset space ~
35196 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
35197 \begin_inset Newline newline
35200 Since \SpecialChar LyX
35201 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
35205 \begin_layout Description
35206 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
35212 \begin_layout Description
35214 \begin_inset space ~
35217 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
35223 \begin_layout Description
35224 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
35225 's native DVI-format.
35226 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
35227 files paths or file names in your document.
35229 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
35236 \begin_layout Description
35237 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
35238 in files paths or file names
35241 \begin_layout Description
35243 \begin_inset space ~
35250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35257 eX) DVI-format using the program
35259 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35262 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
35266 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35274 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
35282 \begin_layout Description
35284 \begin_inset space ~
35287 (cropped) the same as
35291 but with cropped page margins.
35294 \begin_layout Description
35296 \begin_inset space ~
35299 Dot text file with code in the programming language
35303 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
35308 \begin_layout Description
35312 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35320 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
35328 \begin_layout Description
35330 \begin_inset space ~
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35337 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
35341 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
35349 \begin_layout Description
35356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35364 \begin_inset space ~
35375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35388 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35389 source that is compilable with the program
35391 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35395 \begin_layout Description
35402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35410 \begin_inset space ~
35415 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35416 source, additionally all images used in the document
35417 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
35421 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
35424 \begin_layout Description
35431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35439 \begin_inset space ~
35444 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35445 source code, additionally all images used in the document
35446 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
35454 \begin_layout Description
35461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35469 \begin_inset space ~
35480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35493 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35494 source that is compilable with the program
35500 \begin_layout Description
35502 \begin_inset space ~
35506 \begin_inset space ~
35515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35525 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35526 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35532 \begin_layout Description
35539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35549 \begin_inset space ~
35552 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35553 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35559 \begin_inset space \space{}
35564 \begin_inset space ~
35568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35583 represent the version number)
35586 \begin_layout Description
35593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35603 \begin_inset space ~
35607 \begin_inset space ~
35610 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35611 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35612 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35616 \begin_layout Description
35623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35632 yXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35633 's internal XHTML engine
35636 \begin_layout Description
35637 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35642 \begin_layout Description
35643 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
35645 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35648 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
35652 \begin_layout Description
35654 \begin_inset space ~
35657 (cropped) the same as
35660 \begin_inset space ~
35665 but with cropped page margins
35668 \begin_layout Description
35672 \begin_inset space ~
35677 PDF-format using the program
35681 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35684 \begin_layout Description
35688 \begin_inset space ~
35692 \begin_inset space ~
35700 \begin_inset space ~
35705 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35710 \begin_inset space \space{}
35713 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35717 \begin_layout Description
35721 \begin_inset space ~
35728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35737 PDF-format using the program
35739 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35742 , produces PDF-files directly
35745 \begin_layout Description
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35754 PDF-format using the program
35758 , produces PDF-files directly
35761 \begin_layout Description
35765 \begin_inset space ~
35770 PDF-format using the program
35774 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35777 \begin_layout Description
35781 \begin_inset space ~
35788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35797 PDF-format using the program
35802 , produces PDF-files directly
35805 \begin_layout Description
35809 \begin_inset space ~
35817 \begin_layout Description
35821 \begin_inset space ~
35825 \begin_inset space ~
35830 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35831 and then exported as text using the program
35836 \begin_layout Description
35841 PostScript format using the program
35846 \begin_layout Description
35847 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35848 source and also code in the statistical programming
35862 it is possible to use
35866 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35870 \begin_layout Standard
35871 If one of the menu entries
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35887 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35889 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35891 \begin_inset space ~
35895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35897 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35902 \begin_inset Index idx
35905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35906 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35915 \begin_layout Subsection
35919 \begin_layout Standard
35920 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35921 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35924 \begin_inset space ~
35928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35930 reference "sec:Paths"
35935 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35944 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35945 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35946 's preferences as described in section
35947 \begin_inset space ~
35951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35953 reference "subsec:Converters"
35960 \begin_layout Subsection
35961 New and Close Window
35964 \begin_layout Standard
35965 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35969 \begin_layout Subsection
35973 \begin_layout Standard
35974 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35977 \begin_layout Section
35979 \begin_inset Index idx
35982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35991 \begin_layout Subsection
35995 \begin_layout Standard
35996 Described in section
35997 \begin_inset space ~
36001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36003 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
36010 \begin_layout Subsection
36011 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
36014 \begin_layout Standard
36015 Described in section
36016 \begin_inset space ~
36020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36022 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36029 \begin_layout Subsection
36033 \begin_layout Standard
36034 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
36035 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
36038 \begin_layout Subsection
36042 \begin_layout Standard
36043 Selects the whole document.
36046 \begin_layout Subsection
36047 Find & Replace (Quick)
36050 \begin_layout Standard
36051 Described in section
36052 \begin_inset space ~
36056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36058 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36065 \begin_layout Subsection
36066 Find & Replace (Advanced)
36069 \begin_layout Standard
36070 Described in section
36071 \begin_inset space ~
36075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36077 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36084 \begin_layout Subsection
36085 Move Paragraph Up/Down
36088 \begin_layout Standard
36089 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
36093 \begin_layout Subsection
36097 \begin_layout Standard
36098 Described in section
36099 \begin_inset space ~
36103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36105 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
36112 \begin_layout Subsection
36114 \begin_inset Index idx
36117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36118 Paragraph ! Settings
36126 \begin_layout Standard
36127 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
36128 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
36132 \begin_layout Standard
36133 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
36134 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
36140 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36141 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36143 \begin_inset space ~
36151 \begin_layout Subsection
36155 \begin_layout Standard
36156 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
36157 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
36158 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
36162 \begin_layout Standard
36163 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
36165 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
36166 The properties of tables are described in section
36167 \begin_inset space ~
36171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36173 reference "sec:Tables"
36177 , the properties of formulas in chapter
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36184 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36191 \begin_layout Subsection
36192 Increase/Decrease List Depth
36195 \begin_layout Standard
36196 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
36198 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
36199 \begin_inset space ~
36203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36205 reference "sec:Nesting"
36210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36212 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
36219 \begin_layout Subsection
36222 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
36225 \begin_layout Standard
36226 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
36227 nts of the same type.
36229 \begin_inset space ~
36233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36235 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
36239 for an explanation.
36242 \begin_layout Section
36244 \begin_inset Index idx
36247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36256 \begin_layout Standard
36257 At the bottom of the
36261 menu the opened documents are listed.
36264 \begin_layout Subsection
36265 Open/Close all Insets
36268 \begin_layout Standard
36269 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
36272 \begin_layout Subsection
36273 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
36276 \begin_layout Standard
36277 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
36280 \begin_layout Standard
36281 Math macros are described in the
36288 \begin_layout Subsection
36292 \begin_layout Standard
36293 Shows the outline window as described in sections
36294 \begin_inset space ~
36298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36300 reference "sec:Navigating"
36305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36307 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
36314 \begin_layout Subsection
36318 \begin_layout Standard
36319 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
36321 \begin_inset space ~
36325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36327 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36334 \begin_layout Subsection
36338 \begin_layout Standard
36339 Opens a window showing console messages.
36340 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
36342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36345 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
36346 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
36347 is processing the document.
36350 \begin_layout Subsection
36352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36354 name "subsec:Toolbars"
36359 \begin_inset Index idx
36362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36371 \begin_layout Standard
36372 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
36373 All toolbars and the
36376 \begin_inset space ~
36381 can be turned on and off.
36386 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
36398 \begin_inset space ~
36410 \begin_inset space ~
36415 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
36419 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
36426 \begin_layout Standard
36431 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
36435 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
36436 or when a certain feature is enabled.
36437 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
36438 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
36439 is inside a formula or table respectively.
36442 \begin_layout Standard
36444 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
36445 \begin_inset space ~
36449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36451 reference "sec:Toolbars"
36458 \begin_layout Subsection
36462 \begin_layout Standard
36466 \begin_inset space ~
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36478 \begin_inset space ~
36482 \begin_inset space ~
36486 \begin_inset space ~
36491 will split \SpecialChar LyX
36492 's main window vertically while
36495 \begin_inset space ~
36499 \begin_inset space ~
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset space ~
36515 \begin_inset space ~
36520 will split it horizontally.
36521 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36522 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36523 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36524 three or more documents at the same time.
36525 To close a split view, use the menu
36528 \begin_inset space ~
36532 \begin_inset space ~
36540 \begin_layout Subsection
36544 \begin_layout Standard
36545 Closes a split view.
36548 \begin_layout Subsection
36552 \begin_layout Standard
36553 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36554 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36555 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36556 's main window fullscreen.
36557 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36558 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36561 \begin_layout Section
36563 \begin_inset Index idx
36566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36575 \begin_layout Subsection
36579 \begin_layout Standard
36580 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36581 \begin_inset space ~
36585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36587 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36598 \begin_layout Subsection
36600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36602 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36609 \begin_layout Standard
36610 Here you can insert the following characters:
36613 \begin_layout Description
36618 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36621 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36622 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36623 -packages you have installed.
36624 You can get a complete display by checking
36627 \begin_inset space ~
36633 \begin_inset Newline newline
36637 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36645 Not all characters will be visible in the
36649 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36657 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36661 ) can display every character.
36669 \begin_layout Description
36670 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36674 \begin_layout Description
36676 \begin_inset space ~
36680 \begin_inset space ~
36683 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36684 \begin_inset space ~
36688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36690 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36697 \begin_layout Description
36699 \begin_inset space ~
36702 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36706 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36712 \begin_layout Description
36714 \begin_inset space ~
36717 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36720 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36721 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36727 \begin_layout Description
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36732 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36736 \begin_layout Description
36738 \begin_inset space ~
36741 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36745 \begin_layout Description
36747 \begin_inset space ~
36750 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36756 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36762 \begin_layout Description
36764 \begin_inset space ~
36767 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36771 \begin_layout Description
36773 \begin_inset space ~
36777 \begin_inset Index idx
36780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36787 \begin_inset Index idx
36790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36791 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36796 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36797 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36799 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36805 \begin_inset Index idx
36808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36816 \begin_inset Newline newline
36819 More information about this feature can be found in the
36825 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36831 \begin_layout Subsection
36835 \begin_layout Standard
36836 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36839 \begin_layout Description
36840 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36841 \begin_inset script superscript
36843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36852 \begin_layout Description
36853 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36854 \begin_inset script subscript
36856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36865 \begin_layout Description
36867 \begin_inset space ~
36870 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36871 \begin_inset space ~
36875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36877 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36884 \begin_layout Description
36886 \begin_inset space ~
36889 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36896 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36903 \begin_layout Description
36905 \begin_inset space ~
36908 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36909 \begin_inset space ~
36913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36915 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36922 \begin_layout Description
36924 \begin_inset space ~
36927 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36933 \begin_inset space \space{}
36936 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36937 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36946 To insert a fraction use the command
36951 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36955 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36964 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36971 \begin_layout Description
36973 \begin_inset space ~
36976 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36983 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36990 \begin_layout Description
36992 \begin_inset space ~
36995 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36996 \begin_inset space ~
37000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37002 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
37009 \begin_layout Description
37011 \begin_inset space ~
37014 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
37015 \begin_inset space ~
37019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37021 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
37028 \begin_layout Description
37029 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
37030 \begin_inset space ~
37034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37036 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
37043 \begin_layout Description
37045 \begin_inset space ~
37048 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
37049 \begin_inset space ~
37053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37055 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
37062 \begin_layout Description
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37067 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
37068 \begin_inset space ~
37072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37074 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
37081 \begin_layout Description
37083 \begin_inset space ~
37087 \begin_inset space ~
37090 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37097 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37104 \begin_layout Description
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37109 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
37110 as described in section
37111 \begin_inset space ~
37115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37117 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37124 \begin_layout Description
37126 \begin_inset space ~
37129 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
37130 \begin_inset space ~
37134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37136 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37143 \begin_layout Description
37145 \begin_inset space ~
37148 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
37149 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
37151 \begin_inset space ~
37155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37157 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37164 \begin_layout Description
37166 \begin_inset space ~
37169 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
37170 \begin_inset space ~
37174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37176 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37183 \begin_layout Description
37185 \begin_inset space ~
37189 \begin_inset space ~
37192 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
37193 \begin_inset space ~
37197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37199 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37206 \begin_layout Subsection
37210 \begin_layout Standard
37211 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37236 are described in section
37237 \begin_inset space ~
37241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37243 reference "sec:toc"
37252 is described in section
37253 \begin_inset space ~
37257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37259 reference "sec:Index"
37267 is described in section
37268 \begin_inset space ~
37272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37274 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37280 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37283 is described in section
37284 \begin_inset space ~
37288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37290 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
37297 \begin_layout Subsection
37301 \begin_layout Standard
37302 To insert floats, as described in section
37303 \begin_inset space ~
37307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37309 reference "sec:Floats"
37313 and in detail the chapter
37320 \begin_inset space ~
37328 \begin_layout Subsection
37332 \begin_layout Standard
37333 To insert notes, described in section
37334 \begin_inset space ~
37338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37340 reference "sec:Notes"
37347 \begin_layout Subsection
37351 \begin_layout Standard
37352 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
37354 Branches are described in section
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37361 reference "sec:Branches"
37368 \begin_layout Subsection
37372 \begin_layout Standard
37373 Inserts document class-specific insets.
37374 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
37376 An example is the document class
37377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37384 with three custom insets.
37387 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37391 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
37397 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
37400 \begin_layout Subsection
37402 \begin_inset Index idx
37405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37414 \begin_layout Standard
37415 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
37417 For more information see chapter
37419 External Document Parts
37422 \begin_inset space ~
37428 \begin_layout Subsection
37430 \begin_inset Index idx
37433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37442 \begin_layout Standard
37443 Inserts a box in a certain style.
37444 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
37451 \begin_inset space ~
37459 \begin_layout Subsection
37463 \begin_layout Standard
37468 dialog as described in section
37469 \begin_inset space ~
37473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37475 reference "sec:Bibliography"
37482 \begin_layout Subsection
37486 \begin_layout Standard
37491 as described in section
37492 \begin_inset space ~
37496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37498 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37505 \begin_layout Subsection
37509 \begin_layout Standard
37514 as described in section
37515 \begin_inset space ~
37519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37521 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37528 \begin_layout Subsection
37530 \begin_inset Index idx
37533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37540 \begin_inset Index idx
37543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37544 Longtables ! Caption
37552 \begin_layout Standard
37553 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
37554 Floats are described in section
37555 \begin_inset space ~
37559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37561 reference "sec:Floats"
37565 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
37572 \begin_inset space ~
37580 \begin_layout Subsection
37584 \begin_layout Standard
37585 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37586 \begin_inset space ~
37590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37592 reference "sec:Index"
37599 \begin_layout Subsection
37603 \begin_layout Standard
37604 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37605 \begin_inset space ~
37609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37611 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37618 \begin_layout Subsection
37622 \begin_layout Standard
37623 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37624 Tables are described in section
37625 \begin_inset space ~
37629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37631 reference "sec:Tables"
37635 and in detail in the chapter
37642 \begin_inset space ~
37650 \begin_layout Subsection
37654 \begin_layout Standard
37660 Graphics are described in section
37661 \begin_inset space ~
37665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37667 reference "sec:Graphics"
37674 \begin_layout Subsection
37678 \begin_layout Standard
37679 Inserts a URL as described in section
37680 \begin_inset space ~
37684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37686 reference "subsec:URLs"
37693 \begin_layout Subsection
37697 \begin_layout Standard
37698 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37699 \begin_inset space ~
37703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37705 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37712 \begin_layout Subsection
37716 \begin_layout Standard
37717 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37718 \begin_inset space ~
37722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37724 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37731 \begin_layout Subsection
37735 \begin_layout Standard
37736 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37737 \begin_inset space ~
37741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37743 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37750 \begin_layout Subsection
37754 \begin_layout Standard
37755 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37756 title or caption of a float.
37757 Inserts a short title as described in section
37758 \begin_inset space ~
37762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37764 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37771 \begin_layout Subsection
37776 \begin_layout Standard
37777 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37778 Code box as described in section
37779 \begin_inset space ~
37783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37785 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37792 \begin_layout Subsection
37794 \begin_inset Index idx
37797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37806 \begin_layout Standard
37807 Inserts a program listings box.
37808 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37810 Program Code Listings
37815 \begin_inset space ~
37823 \begin_layout Subsection
37827 \begin_layout Standard
37828 Inserts the actual date.
37829 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37833 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37841 \begin_inset space ~
37849 \begin_layout Subsection
37853 \begin_layout Standard
37854 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37855 \begin_inset space ~
37859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37861 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37868 \begin_layout Section
37870 \begin_inset Index idx
37873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37882 \begin_layout Standard
37883 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37884 \begin_inset space ~
37887 of the current document.
37888 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37891 \begin_layout Subsection
37895 \begin_layout Standard
37896 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37897 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37898 to jump, for example, between section
37899 \begin_inset space ~
37903 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37904 \begin_inset space ~
37907 2.5 and use the submenu
37910 \begin_inset space ~
37914 \begin_inset space ~
37921 \begin_inset space ~
37927 \begin_inset space ~
37931 \begin_inset space ~
37937 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37941 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37947 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37950 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37953 \begin_layout Standard
37954 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37958 \begin_inset space ~
37963 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37966 \begin_inset space ~
37971 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37974 \begin_layout Subsection
37975 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37978 \begin_layout Standard
37979 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37983 \begin_layout Subsection
37987 \begin_layout Standard
37988 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37989 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37990 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37994 \begin_inset space ~
37998 \begin_inset space ~
38006 \begin_layout Subsection
38010 \begin_layout Standard
38011 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
38014 The \SpecialChar LyX
38015 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
38017 \begin_inset space ~
38025 \begin_inset space ~
38030 manual for a detailed description.
38033 \begin_layout Section
38035 \begin_inset Index idx
38038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38047 \begin_layout Subsection
38051 \begin_layout Standard
38052 Change Tracking is described in section
38053 \begin_inset space ~
38057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38059 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38066 \begin_layout Subsection
38071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38082 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
38083 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
38084 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38086 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
38087 to the clipboard or update the view.
38088 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38092 \begin_layout Subsection
38093 Start Appendix Here
38096 \begin_layout Standard
38097 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
38098 as described in section
38099 \begin_inset space ~
38103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38105 reference "sec:Appendices"
38112 \begin_layout Subsection
38114 \begin_inset space ~
38120 \begin_layout Standard
38121 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
38122 default output format for the document (menu
38124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38125 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38126 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38128 \begin_inset space ~
38132 \begin_inset space ~
38138 \begin_inset space ~
38142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38144 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38148 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
38151 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38152 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38154 \begin_inset space ~
38157 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38159 \begin_inset space ~
38162 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38164 \begin_inset space ~
38168 \begin_inset space ~
38174 \begin_inset space ~
38178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38180 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38184 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
38185 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38187 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38188 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38190 \begin_inset space ~
38193 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38195 \begin_inset space ~
38198 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38202 \begin_inset space ~
38206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38208 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38213 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38214 when it is first configured.
38215 The default output format is
38218 \begin_inset space ~
38226 \begin_layout Subsection
38227 View (Other Formats)
38230 \begin_layout Standard
38231 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
38232 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
38233 actual document with an external program.
38234 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
38235 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38236 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
38238 All possible formats are listed in section
38239 \begin_inset space ~
38243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38245 reference "subsec:Export"
38250 You should at least see the menu entry
38255 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38257 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38259 \begin_inset space ~
38263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38265 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38270 \begin_inset Index idx
38273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38274 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38283 \begin_layout Standard
38284 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
38285 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38287 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38288 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38290 \begin_inset space ~
38293 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38295 \begin_inset space ~
38298 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38302 \begin_inset space ~
38306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38308 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38313 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38314 when it is first configured.
38317 \begin_layout Subsection
38319 \begin_inset space ~
38325 \begin_layout Standard
38326 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
38327 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
38330 \begin_layout Subsection
38331 Update (Other Formats)
38334 \begin_layout Standard
38335 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
38336 your document without opening a new viewer window.
38339 \begin_layout Subsection
38340 View Master Document
38343 \begin_layout Standard
38344 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38360 \begin_inset space ~
38365 manual for more information on this topic).
38366 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
38367 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
38371 \begin_inset space ~
38375 \begin_inset space ~
38380 generates the output of the whole book, while
38384 will just output the chapter alone.
38387 \begin_layout Standard
38388 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38389 in the document settings (menu
38391 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38392 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38393 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38395 \begin_inset space ~
38399 \begin_inset space ~
38405 \begin_inset space ~
38409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38411 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38415 ) or in the preferences (menu
38417 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38418 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38420 \begin_inset space ~
38423 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38425 \begin_inset space ~
38428 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38430 \begin_inset space ~
38434 \begin_inset space ~
38440 \begin_inset space ~
38444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38446 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38453 \begin_layout Subsection
38454 Update Master Document
38457 \begin_layout Standard
38458 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38474 \begin_inset space ~
38479 manual for more information on this topic).
38480 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
38481 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
38484 \begin_layout Standard
38485 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38486 in the document settings (menu
38488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38489 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38490 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38492 \begin_inset space ~
38496 \begin_inset space ~
38502 \begin_inset space ~
38506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38508 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38512 ) or in the preferences (menu
38514 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38515 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38517 \begin_inset space ~
38520 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38522 \begin_inset space ~
38525 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38527 \begin_inset space ~
38531 \begin_inset space ~
38537 \begin_inset space ~
38541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38543 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38550 \begin_layout Subsection
38554 \begin_layout Standard
38555 Un/compresses the current document.
38558 \begin_layout Subsection
38562 \begin_layout Standard
38563 The document settings are described in appendix
38564 \begin_inset space ~
38568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38570 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38577 \begin_layout Section
38579 \begin_inset Index idx
38582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38591 \begin_layout Subsection
38595 \begin_layout Standard
38596 Spell checking is explained in section
38597 \begin_inset space ~
38601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38603 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38610 \begin_layout Subsection
38614 \begin_layout Standard
38615 The thesaurus is described in section
38616 \begin_inset space ~
38620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38622 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38629 \begin_layout Subsection
38631 \begin_inset Index idx
38634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38641 \begin_inset Index idx
38644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38653 \begin_layout Standard
38654 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38655 the highlighted document part.
38658 \begin_layout Subsection
38663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38671 \begin_inset Index idx
38674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38675 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38684 \begin_layout Standard
38685 Generates with the help of the program
38687 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38690 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38691 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38692 This feature is not available on Windows.
38695 \begin_layout Subsection
38700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38708 \begin_inset Index idx
38711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38721 \begin_layout Standard
38722 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38732 to see the full filename paths.
38735 \begin_layout Subsection
38737 \begin_inset Index idx
38740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38749 \begin_layout Standard
38750 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38751 files as described in section
38752 \begin_inset space ~
38756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38758 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38765 \begin_layout Subsection
38767 \begin_inset Index idx
38770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38783 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38801 \begin_inset Index idx
38804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38805 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38814 \begin_layout Standard
38815 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38816 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38817 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38818 -packages and programs it needs; see
38820 \begin_inset space ~
38824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38826 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38833 \begin_layout Subsection
38837 \begin_layout Standard
38842 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38843 \begin_inset space ~
38847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38849 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38856 \begin_layout Section
38858 \begin_inset Index idx
38861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38870 \begin_layout Standard
38871 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38872 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38874 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38878 \begin_layout Standard
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38888 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38889 -document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38890 -packages and classes found
38891 by \SpecialChar LyX
38893 \begin_inset space ~
38897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38899 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38906 \begin_layout Standard
38910 \begin_inset space ~
38917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38926 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38931 \begin_layout Section
38933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38935 name "sec:Toolbars"
38942 \begin_layout Standard
38943 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38950 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38957 \begin_layout Standard
38958 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38959 This is described in the
38961 Additional Features
38966 \begin_layout Subsection
38968 \begin_inset Index idx
38971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38980 \begin_layout Standard
38981 \begin_inset Graphics
38982 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38990 \begin_layout Standard
38991 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38997 \begin_layout Standard
38998 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39015 \begin_inset Note Note
39018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39019 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
39024 manual for more information.
39032 \begin_layout Standard
39033 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39039 \begin_layout Standard
39040 \begin_inset Tabular
39041 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
39042 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39043 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39044 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39050 \begin_inset Graphics
39051 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
39061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39065 pull-down box for the environments
39078 \begin_layout Standard
39079 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
39085 \begin_layout Standard
39087 \begin_inset Tabular
39088 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
39089 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39090 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39091 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39092 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39115 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39145 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39152 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39175 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39191 arg "dialog-show print"
39199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39205 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39221 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39235 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39265 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39272 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39295 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39302 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39325 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39332 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39355 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39385 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39401 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
39409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39415 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39441 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
39449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39483 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
39491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39497 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39498 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39505 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39526 Emphasize text, function of the
39528 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39530 \begin_inset space ~
39533 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39563 Set text to noun style, function of the
39565 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39567 \begin_inset space ~
39570 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39588 arg "textstyle-apply"
39596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39600 Format text using the current settings in the
39602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39604 \begin_inset space ~
39607 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39640 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39642 \begin_inset space ~
39651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39660 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39688 arg "tabular-insert"
39696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39718 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39730 Toggle outline window on/off,
39732 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39748 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39760 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39775 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39787 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39800 \begin_layout Subsection
39802 \begin_inset Index idx
39805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39814 \begin_layout Standard
39815 \begin_inset Graphics
39816 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39824 \begin_layout Standard
39825 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39831 \begin_layout Standard
39832 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39836 \begin_layout Standard
39837 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39843 \begin_layout Standard
39844 \begin_inset Tabular
39845 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39846 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39847 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39848 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39885 arg "layout Enumerate"
39893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39912 arg "layout Itemize"
39920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39930 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39966 arg "layout Description"
39974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39993 arg "depth-increment"
40001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40007 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40009 \begin_inset space ~
40013 \begin_inset space ~
40022 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40031 arg "depth-decrement"
40039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40045 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40047 \begin_inset space ~
40051 \begin_inset space ~
40060 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40069 arg "float-insert figure"
40077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40084 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40100 arg "float-insert table"
40108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40115 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40152 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40161 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
40169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40191 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
40199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40246 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40255 arg "nomencl-insert"
40263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40280 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40289 arg "footnote-insert"
40297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40303 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40319 arg "marginalnote-insert"
40327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40335 \begin_inset space ~
40344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40368 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40381 \begin_inset space ~
40390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40399 arg "box-insert Frameless"
40407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40443 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40473 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40499 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40508 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
40516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40523 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40539 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40554 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40574 arg "dialog-show character"
40582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40588 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40590 \begin_inset space ~
40593 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40609 arg "layout-paragraph"
40617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40623 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40643 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40657 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40671 \begin_layout Subsection
40672 View/Update Toolbar
40673 \begin_inset Index idx
40676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40677 Toolbar ! View / Update
40685 \begin_layout Standard
40686 \begin_inset Graphics
40687 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40694 \begin_layout Standard
40695 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40701 \begin_layout Standard
40702 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40706 \begin_layout Standard
40707 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40713 \begin_layout Standard
40714 \begin_inset Tabular
40715 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40716 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40717 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40718 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40719 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40742 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40749 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40758 arg "buffer-update"
40766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40772 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40788 arg "master-buffer-view"
40796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40802 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40804 \begin_inset space ~
40813 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40822 arg "master-buffer-update"
40830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40836 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40842 \begin_inset space ~
40851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40860 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40874 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40875 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40876 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40877 Synchronize with Output
40883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40888 \begin_inset Graphics
40889 filename ../images/view-others.png
40891 groupId toolbarbuttons
40902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40909 View (Other Formats)
40915 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40920 \begin_inset Graphics
40921 filename ../images/update-others.png
40923 groupId toolbarbuttons
40932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40938 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40939 Update (Other Formats)
40952 \begin_layout Standard
40953 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40957 \begin_layout Subsection
40961 \begin_layout Standard
40962 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40963 \begin_inset space ~
40967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40969 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40973 , the table toolbar
40974 \begin_inset Index idx
40977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40986 \begin_inset space ~
40991 manual and the math macro toolbar
40992 \begin_inset Index idx
40995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41008 \begin_layout Chapter
41009 The Document Settings
41010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41012 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41017 \begin_inset Index idx
41020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41021 Document ! Settings
41029 \begin_layout Standard
41033 \begin_inset space ~
41038 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
41039 is called with the menu
41041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41045 You can save your document settings as default with the
41047 Save as Document Defaults
41049 button in any dialog.
41050 This will create a template named
41054 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
41055 when you create a new document without
41059 \begin_layout Standard
41064 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
41065 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
41068 \begin_layout Standard
41069 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
41070 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
41071 to find the one you are looking for.
41072 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
41073 the submenus of the dialog.
41075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41079 \begin_inset space \space{}
41083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41090 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
41091 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
41092 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
41095 \begin_layout Section
41099 \begin_layout Standard
41100 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
41102 Document classes are described in section
41103 \begin_inset space ~
41107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41109 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
41117 \begin_layout Standard
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41126 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
41131 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
41132 as a layout for a document class.
41133 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
41135 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
41144 \begin_layout Standard
41145 Some classes use special class options by default.
41146 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
41150 and you can decide to use them or not.
41151 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
41152 recommended you leave them untouched.
41157 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41158 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
41163 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41165 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
41170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41171 When you want to use one of the following drivers
41172 \begin_inset Newline newline
41177 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
41180 \begin_inset Newline newline
41183 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41184 distribution, see section
41189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41191 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
41203 \begin_layout Standard
41208 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
41209 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
41210 in the background if the child document
41211 is opened without its master.
41212 This way child documents are always compilable.
41213 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
41220 \begin_inset space ~
41228 \begin_layout Standard
41229 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41240 \begin_inset Index idx
41243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41245 -packages ! prettyref
41251 \begin_inset Index idx
41254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41256 -packages ! refstyle
41261 for cross-references, see section
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41268 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41275 \begin_layout Section
41279 \begin_layout Standard
41280 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
41281 Please refer to the section
41284 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41297 manual for details.
41300 \begin_layout Section
41304 \begin_layout Standard
41305 Modules are explained in section
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41312 reference "subsec:Modules"
41319 \begin_layout Section
41323 \begin_layout Standard
41325 \begin_inset space ~
41329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41331 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
41338 \begin_layout Section
41342 \begin_layout Standard
41343 The document font settings are described in section
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41350 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
41357 \begin_layout Section
41361 \begin_layout Standard
41362 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
41374 \begin_inset space ~
41379 and whether it should be a
41382 \begin_inset space ~
41387 can also be specified here.
41390 \begin_layout Standard
41391 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
41392 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
41393 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
41395 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
41398 \begin_layout Standard
41401 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
41404 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
41405 justifies the text on screen.
41406 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
41410 \begin_layout Section
41414 \begin_layout Standard
41415 This dialog is described in sections
41416 \begin_inset space ~
41420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41422 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
41427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41429 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
41436 \begin_layout Section
41440 \begin_layout Standard
41441 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
41442 \begin_inset space ~
41446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41448 reference "subsec:Margins"
41455 \begin_layout Section
41457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41459 name "sec:Language-encodings"
41464 \begin_inset Index idx
41467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41468 Language ! Encoding
41476 \begin_layout Standard
41477 The document language and quote styles are set here.
41478 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
41479 (the \SpecialChar LyX
41481 is always encoded in utf8).
41482 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
41483 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
41484 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41485 -command is not known for
41486 a particular character).
41489 \begin_layout Standard
41490 If you use the option
41495 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
41496 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
41497 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41499 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
41500 exactly one encoding.
41501 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
41504 \begin_layout Standard
41506 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
41507 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
41508 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41509 installation supports Unicode), choose
41510 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
41511 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41512 is quite incomplete, so
41513 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
41518 (when \SpecialChar LyX
41519 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41520 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
41521 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41522 -commands is not used, because all
41523 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
41524 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41525 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41526 , two new alternative engines
41527 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41529 Both engines support Unicode natively.
41531 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41553 \begin_inset space ~
41560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41572 \begin_inset space ~
41575 (Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41585 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41590 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41594 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41597 \begin_layout Standard
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41606 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41607 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41617 The possible settings are:
41620 \begin_layout Description
41621 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41623 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41624 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41628 \begin_inset space ~
41632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41634 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41641 \begin_layout Description
41642 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41643 format you will use.
41644 In many cases this will be
41649 \begin_inset Index idx
41652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41660 If the newer package
41665 \begin_inset Index idx
41668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41670 -packages ! polyglossia
41675 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41677 \change_inserted -712698321 1432730145
41681 \change_deleted -712698321 1432730156
41684 non-\SpecialChar TeX
41685 fonts), this package will be used instead of
41692 \begin_layout Description
41694 \begin_inset space ~
41705 would be more appropriate.
41708 \begin_layout Description
41709 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41710 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41714 (for German texts), type in
41717 \begin_inset Newline newline
41722 usepackage{ngerman}
41725 \begin_layout Description
41726 None will not use a language package.
41727 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41730 \begin_layout Standard
41731 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41734 \begin_layout Description
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41751 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41757 \begin_inset Index idx
41760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41762 -packages ! inputenc
41768 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41769 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41770 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41774 \begin_layout Description
41775 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41777 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41778 commands, which may result in a big
41779 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41780 -commands are needed.
41783 \begin_layout Description
41785 \begin_inset space ~
41789 \begin_inset space ~
41792 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41795 \begin_layout Description
41797 \begin_inset space ~
41801 \begin_inset space ~
41804 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41807 \begin_layout Description
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41812 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41815 \begin_layout Description
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41821 \begin_inset space ~
41824 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41825 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41828 \begin_layout Description
41830 \begin_inset space ~
41834 \begin_inset space ~
41837 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41841 \begin_layout Description
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41847 \begin_inset space ~
41850 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41851 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41854 \begin_layout Description
41856 \begin_inset space ~
41860 \begin_inset space ~
41864 \begin_inset space ~
41867 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41868 \begin_inset space ~
41874 \begin_layout Description
41876 \begin_inset space ~
41880 \begin_inset space ~
41884 \begin_inset space ~
41887 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41888 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41891 \begin_layout Description
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41897 \begin_inset space ~
41900 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41901 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41902 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41903 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41904 \begin_inset space ~
41908 \begin_inset space ~
41914 \begin_layout Description
41916 \begin_inset space ~
41920 \begin_inset space ~
41923 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41924 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41925 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41927 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41928 \begin_inset space ~
41932 \begin_inset space ~
41938 \begin_layout Description
41940 \begin_inset space ~
41944 \begin_inset space ~
41947 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41950 \begin_layout Description
41952 \begin_inset space ~
41956 \begin_inset space ~
41959 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41962 \begin_layout Description
41964 \begin_inset space ~
41968 \begin_inset space ~
41971 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41974 \begin_layout Description
41976 \begin_inset space ~
41979 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41982 \begin_layout Description
41984 \begin_inset space ~
41987 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41990 \begin_layout Description
41992 \begin_inset space ~
41996 \begin_inset space ~
41999 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
42002 \begin_layout Description
42004 \begin_inset space ~
42008 \begin_inset space ~
42014 \begin_layout Description
42016 \begin_inset space ~
42020 \begin_inset space ~
42023 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
42026 \begin_layout Description
42028 \begin_inset space ~
42032 \begin_inset space ~
42038 \begin_layout Description
42040 \begin_inset space ~
42044 \begin_inset space ~
42047 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42053 \begin_inset Index idx
42056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42063 , when using this, set the document language to
42068 \begin_layout Description
42070 \begin_inset space ~
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42077 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42082 , when using this, set the document language to
42085 \begin_inset space ~
42091 \begin_layout Description
42093 \begin_inset space ~
42097 \begin_inset space ~
42100 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42106 \begin_inset Index idx
42109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42111 -packages ! japanese
42116 , when using this, set the document language to
42121 \begin_layout Description
42123 \begin_inset space ~
42127 \begin_inset space ~
42130 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42135 , when using this, set the document language to
42140 \begin_layout Description
42142 \begin_inset space ~
42146 \begin_inset space ~
42149 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42154 , when using this, set the document language to
42159 \begin_layout Description
42161 \begin_inset space ~
42164 (EUC-KR) for Korean
42167 \begin_layout Description
42169 \begin_inset space ~
42173 \begin_inset space ~
42177 \begin_inset space ~
42180 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
42183 \begin_layout Description
42185 \begin_inset space ~
42189 \begin_inset space ~
42193 \begin_inset space ~
42196 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
42197 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
42198 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
42201 \begin_layout Description
42203 \begin_inset space ~
42207 \begin_inset space ~
42213 \begin_layout Description
42215 \begin_inset space ~
42219 \begin_inset space ~
42222 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
42223 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
42226 \begin_layout Description
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42232 \begin_inset space ~
42235 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42241 \begin_inset Index idx
42244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42251 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
42254 \begin_layout Description
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42259 (Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42261 \begin_inset space ~
42264 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
42271 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42274 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42281 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42282 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42284 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
42287 \begin_layout Description
42289 \begin_inset space ~
42293 \begin_inset space ~
42296 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42302 \begin_inset Index idx
42305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42312 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
42315 \begin_layout Description
42317 \begin_inset space ~
42320 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42326 \begin_inset Index idx
42329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42331 -packages ! inputenc
42337 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
42341 \begin_layout Description
42343 \begin_inset space ~
42347 \begin_inset space ~
42351 \begin_inset space ~
42354 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
42355 \begin_inset space ~
42361 \begin_layout Description
42363 \begin_inset space ~
42367 \begin_inset space ~
42371 \begin_inset space ~
42374 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
42375 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
42376 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
42380 \begin_layout Description
42382 \begin_inset space ~
42386 \begin_inset space ~
42390 \begin_inset space ~
42393 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
42394 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
42397 \begin_layout Section
42399 \begin_inset Index idx
42402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42409 \begin_inset Index idx
42412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42419 \begin_inset Index idx
42422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42423 Color ! Shaded boxes
42429 \begin_inset Index idx
42432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42433 Color ! Greyed-out notes
42441 \begin_layout Standard
42442 Here you can alter the font color for the
42446 (default: black), for
42449 \begin_inset space ~
42454 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
42458 (default: white) and for
42461 \begin_inset space ~
42471 sets the color back to the default.
42474 \begin_layout Standard
42475 Clicking any button showing
42483 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
42484 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
42485 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
42486 later more quickly.
42489 \begin_layout Standard
42490 Note, if you change the
42493 \begin_inset space ~
42498 font color and use the option
42501 \begin_inset space ~
42506 in the document settings under
42509 \begin_inset space ~
42514 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
42515 \begin_inset space ~
42519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42521 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42528 \begin_layout Standard
42529 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
42535 \begin_layout Standard
42539 \begin_inset space ~
42548 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
42551 \begin_inset space ~
42554 Code after a forced page break:
42557 \begin_layout Itemize
42558 For the page color:
42559 \begin_inset Newline newline
42566 pagecolor{color name}
42569 \begin_layout Itemize
42570 For the text color:
42571 \begin_inset Newline newline
42581 \begin_layout Standard
42582 You are restricted to one of
42618 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42625 \begin_inset space ~
42631 \begin_inset Newline newline
42634 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42635 names to refer to them:
42638 \begin_layout Itemize
42644 \begin_inset Newline newline
42649 page_backgroundcolor
42652 \begin_layout Itemize
42656 \begin_inset space ~
42662 \begin_inset Newline newline
42670 \begin_layout Itemize
42674 \begin_inset space ~
42680 \begin_inset Newline newline
42688 \begin_layout Itemize
42692 \begin_inset space ~
42698 \begin_inset Newline newline
42706 \begin_layout Standard
42707 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42710 \begin_inset space ~
42718 \begin_inset space ~
42726 \begin_layout Section
42730 \begin_layout Standard
42731 Here you can adjust the
42735 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42739 as described in section
42740 \begin_inset space ~
42744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42746 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42753 \begin_layout Section
42757 \begin_layout Standard
42758 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42764 \begin_inset Index idx
42767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42779 \begin_inset Index idx
42782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42784 -packages ! jurabib
42792 Sectioned bibliography
42794 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42800 \begin_inset Index idx
42803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42805 -packages ! bibtopic
42810 and you can select a
42814 for the generation of the bibliography.
42815 For a further description see section
42816 \begin_inset space ~
42820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42822 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42829 \begin_layout Section
42833 \begin_layout Standard
42834 Here you can define the
42838 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42840 \begin_inset space ~
42844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42846 reference "sec:Index"
42853 \begin_layout Section
42857 \begin_layout Standard
42858 The PDF properties are explained in section
42859 \begin_inset space ~
42863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42865 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42872 \begin_layout Section
42876 \begin_layout Standard
42877 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42878 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42884 \begin_inset Index idx
42887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42889 -packages ! amsmath
42899 \begin_inset Index idx
42902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42904 -packages ! amssymb
42914 \begin_inset Index idx
42917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42929 \begin_inset Index idx
42932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42944 \begin_inset Index idx
42947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42949 -packages ! mathdots
42959 \begin_inset Index idx
42962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42964 -packages ! mathtools
42974 \begin_inset Index idx
42977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42989 \begin_inset Index idx
42992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42994 -packages ! stackrel
43004 \begin_inset Index idx
43007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43009 -packages ! stmaryrd
43019 \begin_inset Index idx
43022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43024 -packages ! undertilde
43029 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
43032 \begin_layout Description
43033 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43034 -errors in formulas,
43035 ensure that you have this enabled.
43038 \begin_layout Description
43039 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
43040 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43041 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
43045 \begin_layout Description
43046 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
43049 \begin_inset space ~
43061 \begin_layout Description
43062 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
43065 \begin_inset space ~
43077 \begin_layout Description
43078 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
43089 \begin_layout Description
43090 mathtools is used for the math commands
43126 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
43133 \begin_layout Description
43134 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
43136 Chemical Symbols and Equations
43145 \begin_layout Description
43146 stackrel is used for the math command
43163 \begin_layout Description
43164 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
43167 \begin_layout Description
43168 undertilde is used for the math command
43176 Accents for one Character
43185 \begin_layout Section
43189 \begin_layout Standard
43190 The float placement options are described in the section
43193 \begin_inset space ~
43201 \begin_inset space ~
43209 \begin_layout Section
43213 \begin_layout Standard
43214 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
43216 Program Code Listings
43221 \begin_inset space ~
43229 \begin_layout Section
43233 \begin_layout Standard
43234 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
43242 set to be used and set the
43247 The itemize environment is described in section
43248 \begin_inset space ~
43252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43254 reference "sec:Itemize"
43261 \begin_layout Standard
43262 You can furthermore specify a
43265 \begin_inset space ~
43270 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43271 command of the desired character.
43272 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
43279 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
43281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43285 \begin_inset space \space{}
43289 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
43299 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
43300 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
43303 \begin_layout Standard
43304 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43312 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43313 -packages in the preamble (menu
43316 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43317 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43320 \begin_inset space ~
43326 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
43330 usepackage{textcomp}
43333 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
43337 usepackage{amssymb}
43347 \begin_layout Section
43351 \begin_layout Standard
43352 Branches are described in section
43353 \begin_inset space ~
43357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43359 reference "sec:Branches"
43366 \begin_layout Section
43368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43370 name "sec:Doc-Output"
43377 \begin_layout Standard
43378 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
43381 \begin_layout Description
43383 \begin_inset space ~
43387 \begin_inset space ~
43390 Format: The format that is used when you enter
43391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43410 View Master Document
43411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43418 Update Master Document
43419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43426 menu or the toolbar.
43427 The default is set in
43429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43430 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43432 \begin_inset space ~
43435 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43439 \begin_inset space ~
43443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43445 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43452 \begin_layout Description
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43461 Output settings for the menu
43463 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43471 For a detailed description see section
43473 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43478 \begin_inset space ~
43486 \begin_layout Description
43488 \begin_inset space ~
43492 \begin_inset space ~
43495 Options offers settings for the export format
43501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 \begin_inset space ~
43519 will assure that the output follows exactly version
43520 \begin_inset space ~
43523 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
43527 \begin_inset space ~
43532 settings are described in detail in section
43534 Math Output in XHTML
43539 \begin_inset space ~
43548 \begin_inset space ~
43552 \begin_inset space ~
43557 is used for the size of equations in the output.
43560 \begin_layout Section
43565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43575 \begin_layout Standard
43576 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43578 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43580 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43582 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43586 \begin_layout Standard
43587 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43588 -syntax is given in section
43589 \begin_inset space ~
43593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43595 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43602 \begin_layout Chapter
43608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43610 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43615 \begin_inset Index idx
43618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43627 \begin_layout Standard
43628 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43630 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43634 It has the following submenus.
43637 \begin_layout Section
43641 \begin_layout Subsection
43645 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43646 User Interface File
43647 \begin_inset Index idx
43650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43651 Customization ! of toolbars
43657 \begin_inset Index idx
43660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43661 Customization ! of menus
43669 \begin_layout Standard
43670 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43671 interface (ui) file.
43672 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43680 \begin_layout Description
43685 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43688 \begin_layout Description
43695 the menu entries in popup context menus
43698 \begin_layout Description
43703 specifies the toolbar buttons
43706 \begin_layout Standard
43707 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43708 and edit the entries.
43711 \begin_layout Standard
43712 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43724 entries must be finished with an explicit
43749 and in the case of the
43750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43762 The syntax for the entries is:
43765 \begin_layout Standard
43766 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43795 \begin_layout Standard
43797 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43800 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43801 -functions are listed in the menu
43803 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43816 \begin_inset space ~
43824 \begin_layout Standard
43825 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43831 \begin_layout Standard
43832 For example, assuming you use the menu
43834 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43837 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43841 \begin_layout Standard
43842 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43866 \begin_layout Standard
43868 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43883 to have the sixth bookmark.
43886 \begin_layout Standard
43890 \begin_inset space ~
43895 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43896 's toolbar buttons.
43897 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43898 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43901 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43912 \begin_layout Standard
43915 Enable tool tips in main work area
43917 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43921 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43925 \begin_layout Standard
43930 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43931 should display in the menu
43933 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43935 \begin_inset space ~
43943 \begin_layout Subsection
43947 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43951 \begin_layout Standard
43954 Restore window layouts and geometries
43957 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43958 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43962 \begin_layout Standard
43965 Restore cursor positions
43967 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43971 \begin_layout Standard
43974 Load opened files from last session
43976 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43980 \begin_layout Standard
43983 Clear all session information
43985 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43986 sessions (cursor positions, names
43987 of last opened documents, etc.).
43990 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43994 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43999 \begin_inset Index idx
44002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44011 \begin_layout Standard
44014 Backup original documents when saving
44016 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
44017 it was saved the last time.
44018 It is stored in the
44021 \begin_inset space ~
44027 \begin_inset space ~
44031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44033 reference "sec:Paths"
44037 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
44040 \begin_inset space ~
44046 The backup file has the file extension
44047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44061 \begin_layout Standard
44064 Backup documents, every
44066 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
44069 \begin_layout Standard
44072 Save documents compressed by default
44074 always saves files in a compressed format.
44077 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44078 Windows & work area
44081 \begin_layout Standard
44084 Open documents in tabs
44086 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
44090 \begin_layout Standard
44095 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
44100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44108 reference "sec:Paths"
44112 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
44119 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
44120 documents will be opened in the same running instance
44121 of \SpecialChar LyX
44123 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
44124 instance is created for each file.
44127 \begin_layout Standard
44130 Single close-tab button
44132 is checked, there will only be one close button (
44135 \begin_inset Graphics
44136 filename ../images/closetab.png
44143 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
44144 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
44147 \begin_layout Standard
44148 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44156 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
44157 before the change takes effect.
44165 \begin_layout Standard
44170 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
44172 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
44174 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44178 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
44179 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
44180 and only want to close the view in once instance.
44183 \begin_layout Subsection
44185 \begin_inset Index idx
44188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44197 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44204 \begin_layout Standard
44205 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
44209 \begin_layout Standard
44210 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44218 This section only deals with the fonts
44222 the \SpecialChar LyX
44224 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
44227 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44228 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44239 \begin_layout Standard
44240 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
44257 (depends on the system) as its
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44276 \begin_layout Standard
44277 You can change the font size with the
44284 \begin_layout Standard
44289 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
44291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44294 points have the size of 1
44295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44299 \begin_inset space ~
44303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44305 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
44310 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
44311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44315 The sizes are explained in detail in section
44316 \begin_inset space ~
44320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44322 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
44329 \begin_layout Standard
44332 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
44334 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
44335 needs to redraw the screen less often.
44336 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
44337 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
44338 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
44340 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
44341 \begin_inset space ~
44347 \begin_layout Subsection
44349 \begin_inset Index idx
44352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44353 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
44360 \begin_inset Index idx
44363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44372 \begin_layout Standard
44373 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
44374 by choosing an item in the
44375 list and selecting the
44382 \begin_layout Standard
44383 By checking the option
44387 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
44390 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
44391 \begin_inset space ~
44395 \begin_inset space ~
44400 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
44403 \begin_layout Subsection
44405 \begin_inset Index idx
44408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44417 \begin_layout Standard
44418 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
44422 \begin_layout Standard
44427 enables previewing snippets of your document.
44428 This feature is described in section
44429 \begin_inset space ~
44433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44435 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44442 \begin_layout Standard
44443 Checking the option
44446 \begin_inset space ~
44450 \begin_inset space ~
44454 \begin_inset space ~
44459 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
44462 \begin_layout Section
44464 \begin_inset Index idx
44467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44476 \begin_layout Subsection
44480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44484 \begin_layout Standard
44487 Cursor follows scrollbar
44489 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
44493 \begin_layout Standard
44494 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
44495 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
44496 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
44499 \begin_layout Standard
44502 Scroll below end of document
44504 is self-explanatory.
44507 \begin_layout Standard
44508 In \SpecialChar LyX
44509 one can jump from word to word by pressing
44516 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
44518 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
44519 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
44522 \begin_layout Standard
44525 Sort environments alphabetically
44527 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44530 \begin_layout Standard
44533 Group environments by their category
44535 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44538 \begin_layout Standard
44543 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44558 \begin_layout Standard
44559 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44564 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44565 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44569 \begin_layout Subsection
44571 \begin_inset Index idx
44574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44581 \begin_inset Index idx
44584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44585 Settings ! Shortcuts
44593 \begin_layout Standard
44598 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44599 -function to a key.
44600 Several binding files are available, among them:
44603 \begin_layout Description
44604 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44607 \begin_layout Description
44608 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44620 \begin_layout Description
44621 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44632 \begin_layout Standard
44633 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44638 , and binding files for special languages.
44639 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44644 \begin_inset space \space{}
44648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44656 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44657 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44658 will try to use the appropriate binding
44662 \begin_layout Standard
44663 Some binding files, like
44667 , only have a limited scope.
44668 When looking at the end of the file
44672 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44675 \begin_layout Standard
44679 \begin_inset space ~
44683 \begin_inset space ~
44688 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44689 in the selected key binding file.
44692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44696 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44701 \begin_inset Index idx
44704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44705 Key Bindings ! Editing
44713 \begin_layout Standard
44714 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44715 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44716 -functions and the bound shortcuts.
44717 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44720 Show key-bindings containing
44723 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44724 Insert there for example as keyword
44725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44732 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44733 functions that contain
44734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44742 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44743 All \SpecialChar LyX
44744 -functions are also listed in the file
44749 that you will find in the
44756 \begin_layout Standard
44757 For example, to add the shortcut
44765 , select the function and press the
44770 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44771 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44774 \begin_layout Standard
44775 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44776 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44778 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44779 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44781 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44786 \begin_layout Standard
44787 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44790 \begin_layout Standard
44791 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44793 The syntax of the entries is:
44796 \begin_layout Standard
44802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44821 \begin_layout Subsection
44823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44825 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44830 \begin_inset Index idx
44833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44840 \begin_inset Index idx
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44844 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44852 \begin_layout Standard
44853 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44854 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44855 provides keyboard maps.
44856 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44857 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44860 \begin_inset space ~
44864 \begin_inset space ~
44869 and select the keyboard map file named
44876 \begin_layout Standard
44885 keyboard map and, if you use the
44889 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44892 arg "keymap-primary"
44898 arg "keymap-secondary"
44901 respectively or toggle between them with
44904 arg "keymap-toggle"
44910 \begin_layout Standard
44911 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44919 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44928 \begin_layout Standard
44929 You can also specify the mouse
44931 Wheel scrolling speed
44934 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44938 \begin_layout Standard
44946 \begin_inset space ~
44950 \begin_inset space ~
44955 you can select a key for zooming.
44956 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44959 \begin_layout Subsection
44963 \begin_layout Standard
44964 Input completion is described in section
44965 \begin_inset space ~
44969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44971 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44978 \begin_layout Section
44980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44987 \begin_inset Index idx
44990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44997 \begin_inset Index idx
45000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45009 \begin_layout Standard
45010 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
45011 are normally determined during
45013 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
45016 \begin_layout Description
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45021 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
45022 's working directory.
45023 It is the default when you
45034 \begin_inset space ~
45042 \begin_layout Description
45044 \begin_inset space ~
45047 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
45049 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45051 \begin_inset space ~
45055 \begin_inset space ~
45063 \begin_layout Description
45065 \begin_inset space ~
45068 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
45074 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45078 \begin_inset Newline newline
45082 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45094 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
45095 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
45103 \begin_layout Description
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45109 \begin_inset Index idx
45112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45118 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
45119 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
45120 \begin_inset space ~
45124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45126 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45134 will be used to save the backups.
45135 \begin_inset Newline newline
45138 Backup files have the ending
45139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45149 \begin_layout Description
45154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45162 \begin_inset space ~
45165 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
45166 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
45168 \begin_inset Newline newline
45175 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45181 You can edit this file with the program
45190 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
45191 in its preferences under
45194 \begin_inset space ~
45200 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
45205 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
45207 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
45208 in your \SpecialChar LyX
45214 and \SpecialChar LyX
45215 need to be running the same time.
45216 \begin_inset Newline newline
45219 The pipe is also used for the
45224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45230 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45235 \begin_inset Newline newline
45238 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
45239 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
45240 \begin_inset Newline newline
45256 \begin_layout Description
45258 \begin_inset space ~
45261 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
45264 \begin_layout Description
45266 \begin_inset space ~
45269 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
45270 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
45271 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
45274 \begin_layout Description
45276 \begin_inset space ~
45279 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
45285 You only need to specify it if you are using
45289 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
45291 For \SpecialChar LyX
45296 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
45300 \begin_layout Description
45302 \begin_inset space ~
45305 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
45306 When \SpecialChar LyX
45307 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
45308 to find it on the system.
45309 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
45311 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
45313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45320 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
45321 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
45324 \begin_layout Description
45326 \begin_inset space ~
45329 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
45330 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
45331 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
45332 code or in the document
45334 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
45336 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
45337 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
45338 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
45339 scanned for the input files.
45340 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
45341 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
45343 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
45344 compilation may fail for some documents.
45347 \begin_layout Section
45351 \begin_layout Standard
45352 Here you can insert your
45361 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
45363 \begin_inset space ~
45367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45369 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45373 , to mark changes you make as yours.
45376 \begin_layout Section
45378 \begin_inset Index idx
45381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45382 Language ! Settings
45388 \begin_inset Index idx
45391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45392 Settings ! Language
45400 \begin_layout Subsection
45402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45404 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45411 \begin_layout Description
45413 \begin_inset space ~
45417 \begin_inset space ~
45420 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
45422 You can find its actual translation status here:
45423 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45425 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
45432 \begin_layout Description
45434 \begin_inset space ~
45437 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
45438 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
45439 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
45440 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
45441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45457 The most widespread language package is
45462 \begin_inset Index idx
45465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45472 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
45474 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45475 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45476 come with the alternative
45482 \begin_inset Index idx
45485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45487 -packages ! polyglossia
45492 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
45493 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
45499 The available selections are described in section
45500 \begin_inset space ~
45504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45506 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
45513 \begin_layout Description
45515 \begin_inset space ~
45518 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45519 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
45520 you can here specify the command to start the package.
45521 An example is the start command
45527 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
45529 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
45533 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45548 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45553 \begin_layout Description
45555 \begin_inset space ~
45563 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45564 command toggles the package on and off.
45567 \begin_layout Description
45569 \begin_inset space ~
45573 \begin_inset space ~
45576 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45580 \begin_layout Description
45582 \begin_inset space ~
45586 \begin_inset space ~
45589 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45593 \begin_layout Description
45595 \begin_inset space ~
45599 \begin_inset space ~
45602 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45603 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45604 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45606 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45613 \begin_layout Description
45615 \begin_inset space ~
45618 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45620 When this option is not set, the
45623 \begin_inset space ~
45628 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45630 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45633 \begin_inset space ~
45641 \begin_layout Description
45643 \begin_inset space ~
45649 \begin_inset space ~
45655 When it is not set, the
45658 \begin_inset space ~
45663 is set to the end of the document.
45666 \begin_layout Description
45668 \begin_inset space ~
45672 \begin_inset space ~
45675 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45676 language will be underlined in blue.
45679 \begin_layout Description
45681 \begin_inset space ~
45685 \begin_inset space ~
45688 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45689 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45692 \begin_layout Description
45694 \begin_inset space ~
45697 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45698 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45699 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45700 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45703 \begin_layout Subsection
45707 \begin_layout Standard
45708 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45709 \begin_inset space ~
45713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45715 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45722 \begin_layout Section
45726 \begin_layout Subsection
45730 \begin_layout Description
45732 \begin_inset space ~
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45739 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45742 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45743 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45745 \begin_inset space ~
45751 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45754 \begin_layout Description
45756 \begin_inset space ~
45760 \begin_inset Index idx
45763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45770 \begin_inset Index idx
45773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45774 Settings ! Date format
45779 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45780 \begin_inset Newline newline
45784 \begin_inset Flex URL
45787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45789 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
45795 \begin_inset Newline newline
45798 For example the format
45799 \begin_inset Newline newline
45803 \begin_inset Newline newline
45806 prints the date as day/month/year.
45809 \begin_layout Description
45811 \begin_inset space ~
45815 \begin_inset space ~
45818 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45819 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45822 \begin_layout Description
45824 \begin_inset space ~
45827 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45829 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45831 \begin_inset space ~
45837 For a detailed description see section
45839 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45844 \begin_inset space ~
45852 \begin_layout Subsection
45854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45856 name "subsec:Printer"
45861 \begin_inset Index idx
45864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45871 \begin_inset Index idx
45874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45883 \begin_layout Description
45885 \begin_inset space ~
45888 printer Here you can specify the name of your
45893 The name will be used when the
45898 \begin_inset Newline newline
45902 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45910 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
45918 \begin_layout Description
45920 \begin_inset space ~
45923 command is the command \SpecialChar LyX
45925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45941 \begin_layout Description
45943 \begin_inset space ~
45947 \begin_inset space ~
45950 Options Here you can specify printer options.
45951 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
45952 of the program that provides the
45959 \begin_layout Description
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45965 \begin_inset space ~
45969 \begin_inset space ~
45972 printer This option works only for the
45977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45989 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
45990 This is an option only for dvips experts.
45993 \begin_layout Subsection
45998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46008 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
46013 \begin_inset Index idx
46016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
46026 \begin_layout Description
46028 \begin_inset space ~
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46043 \begin_inset space ~
46047 \begin_inset space ~
46050 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
46055 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
46076 are used for Cyrillic.
46077 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
46078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46090 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
46092 sets up in the background.
46093 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
46096 \begin_layout Description
46098 \begin_inset space ~
46102 \begin_inset space ~
46105 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
46110 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46114 \begin_layout Description
46116 \begin_inset space ~
46120 \begin_inset space ~
46124 \begin_inset space ~
46128 \begin_inset space ~
46131 options They only have an effect when the program
46135 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
46138 \begin_layout Standard
46139 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
46140 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
46141 manuals of the applications.
46144 \begin_layout Description
46146 \begin_inset space ~
46149 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
46150 \begin_inset space ~
46154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46156 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
46163 \begin_layout Description
46165 \begin_inset space ~
46168 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
46169 \begin_inset space ~
46173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46175 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
46182 \begin_layout Description
46184 \begin_inset space ~
46187 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
46188 \begin_inset space ~
46192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46194 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
46201 \begin_layout Description
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46214 \begin_inset space ~
46217 command Command for the program
46219 Check\SpecialChar TeX
46222 that is described in the section
46224 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
46229 Additional Features
46234 \begin_layout Standard
46235 There are additionally the following options:
46238 \begin_layout Description
46240 \begin_inset space ~
46244 \begin_inset space ~
46248 \begin_inset space ~
46252 \begin_inset space ~
46257 \begin_inset space ~
46260 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
46261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46278 to separate folders.
46279 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
46281 \begin_inset Index idx
46284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46291 \begin_inset Index idx
46294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46303 \begin_layout Description
46305 \begin_inset space ~
46309 \begin_inset space ~
46313 \begin_inset space ~
46317 \begin_inset space ~
46321 \begin_inset space ~
46325 \begin_inset space ~
46328 changes Removes all manually set
46334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46335 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46337 \begin_inset space ~
46342 dialog when changing the document class.
46345 \begin_layout Section
46347 \begin_inset space ~
46351 \begin_inset Index idx
46354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 \begin_layout Subsection
46365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46367 name "subsec:Converters"
46372 \begin_inset Index idx
46375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46384 \begin_layout Standard
46385 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
46386 from one format to another.
46387 You can modify converters or create new ones.
46388 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
46395 \begin_inset space ~
46400 field and press the
46405 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
46409 \begin_inset space ~
46414 drop-down list, modify the
46418 field and press the
46425 \begin_layout Standard
46428 Converter File Cache
46434 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
46436 Maximum Age (in days
46439 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
46440 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
46443 \begin_layout Standard
46444 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
46445 definition, is described in the section
46456 \begin_layout Subsection
46458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46460 name "sec:File-Formats"
46465 \begin_inset Index idx
46468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 \begin_inset Index idx
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46487 \begin_layout Standard
46488 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
46498 programs that should be used for certain formats.
46501 \begin_layout Standard
46502 You can also define the
46504 Default output format
46506 that is used when you use
46508 View, Update, View Master Document
46512 Update Master Document
46518 menu or the toolbar.
46521 \begin_layout Standard
46522 More about formats and their options is described in the section
46533 \begin_layout Standard
46534 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
46536 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
46537 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
46538 This is done by specifying a
46543 More about this is described in the section
46554 \begin_layout Chapter
46555 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46557 \begin_inset Index idx
46560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46569 name "chap:Units-available-in"
46576 \begin_layout Standard
46578 \begin_inset space ~
46582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46584 reference "tab:Units"
46588 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46589 and used in this documentation.
46592 \begin_layout Standard
46593 \begin_inset Float table
46599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46600 \begin_inset Caption Standard
46602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46618 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46626 \begin_inset Tabular
46627 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
46628 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
46629 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46630 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46781 scaled point (65536
46782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46842 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46897 % of original image width
46904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47111 \begin_layout Chapter
47113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47115 name "chap:Credits"
47122 \begin_layout Standard
47123 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
47124 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
47127 \begin_layout Itemize
47130 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
47133 \begin_layout Itemize
47139 \begin_layout Itemize
47145 \begin_layout Itemize
47151 \begin_layout Itemize
47157 \begin_layout Itemize
47163 \begin_layout Itemize
47169 \begin_layout Itemize
47175 \begin_layout Itemize
47178 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
47181 \begin_layout Itemize
47187 \begin_layout Itemize
47193 \begin_layout Itemize
47199 \begin_layout Itemize
47205 \begin_layout Itemize
47211 \begin_layout Itemize
47217 \begin_layout Itemize
47223 \begin_layout Itemize
47229 \begin_layout Itemize
47230 The \SpecialChar LyX
47232 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47241 \begin_layout Standard
47242 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47245 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
47252 \begin_layout Bibliography
47253 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47254 LatexCommand bibitem
47260 The \SpecialChar LyX
47262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47265 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
47270 \begin_inset Newline newline
47274 \begin_inset Flex URL
47277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47279 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
47287 \begin_layout Bibliography
47288 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47289 LatexCommand bibitem
47290 key "latexcompanion"
47294 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
47296 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47297 Companion Second Edition.
47300 Addison-Wesley, 2004
47303 \begin_layout Bibliography
47304 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47305 LatexCommand bibitem
47310 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
47313 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47317 Addison-Wesley, 2003
47320 \begin_layout Bibliography
47321 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47322 LatexCommand bibitem
47330 : A Document Preparation System.
47333 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
47336 \begin_layout Bibliography
47337 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47338 LatexCommand bibitem
47347 The \SpecialChar TeX
47351 Addison-Wesley, 1984
47354 \begin_layout Bibliography
47355 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47356 LatexCommand bibitem
47361 The \SpecialChar TeX
47363 \begin_inset Newline newline
47367 \begin_inset Flex URL
47370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47372 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
47380 \begin_layout Bibliography
47381 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47382 LatexCommand bibitem
47387 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47389 \begin_inset Newline newline
47393 \begin_inset Flex URL
47396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47398 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
47406 \begin_layout Bibliography
47407 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47408 LatexCommand bibitem
47414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47416 name "Documentation"
47417 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
47423 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47427 \begin_inset Newline newline
47431 \begin_inset Flex URL
47434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47436 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
47444 \begin_layout Bibliography
47445 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47446 LatexCommand bibitem
47452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47454 name "Documentation"
47455 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
47459 how to use the program
47461 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47465 \begin_inset Newline newline
47469 \begin_inset Flex URL
47472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47474 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47482 \begin_layout Bibliography
47483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47484 LatexCommand bibitem
47490 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47492 name "Documentation"
47493 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47502 \begin_inset Newline newline
47506 \begin_inset Flex URL
47509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47511 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47519 \begin_layout Bibliography
47520 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47521 LatexCommand bibitem
47527 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47529 name "Documentation"
47530 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47539 \begin_inset Newline newline
47543 \begin_inset Flex URL
47546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47548 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47556 \begin_layout Bibliography
47557 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47558 LatexCommand bibitem
47564 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47566 name "Documentation"
47567 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47571 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47573 \begin_inset Newline newline
47577 \begin_inset Flex URL
47580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47582 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47590 \begin_layout Bibliography
47591 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47592 LatexCommand bibitem
47598 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47600 name "Documentation"
47601 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47605 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47611 \begin_inset Index idx
47614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47616 -packages ! caption
47622 \begin_inset Newline newline
47626 \begin_inset Flex URL
47629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47631 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47639 \begin_layout Bibliography
47640 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47641 LatexCommand bibitem
47647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47649 name "Documentation"
47650 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47654 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47660 \begin_inset Index idx
47663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47665 -packages ! enumitem
47671 \begin_inset Newline newline
47675 \begin_inset Flex URL
47678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47680 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47688 \begin_layout Bibliography
47689 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47690 LatexCommand bibitem
47696 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47698 name "Documentation"
47699 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47703 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47709 \begin_inset Index idx
47712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47714 -packages ! fancyhdr
47720 \begin_inset Newline newline
47724 \begin_inset Flex URL
47727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47729 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47737 \begin_layout Bibliography
47738 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47739 LatexCommand bibitem
47745 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47747 name "Documentation"
47748 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47752 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47758 \begin_inset Index idx
47761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47763 -packages ! hyperref
47769 \begin_inset Newline newline
47773 \begin_inset Flex URL
47776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47778 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47786 \begin_layout Bibliography
47787 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47788 LatexCommand bibitem
47794 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47796 name "Documentation"
47797 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47801 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47807 \begin_inset Index idx
47810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47812 -packages ! nomencl
47818 \begin_inset Newline newline
47822 \begin_inset Flex URL
47825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47827 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47835 \begin_layout Bibliography
47836 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47837 LatexCommand bibitem
47843 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47845 name "Documentation"
47846 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47850 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47856 \begin_inset Index idx
47859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47861 -packages ! prettyref
47867 \begin_inset Newline newline
47871 \begin_inset Flex URL
47874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47876 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47884 \begin_layout Bibliography
47885 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47886 LatexCommand bibitem
47892 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47894 name "Documentation"
47895 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47899 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47905 \begin_inset Index idx
47908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47910 -packages ! refstyle
47916 \begin_inset Newline newline
47920 \begin_inset Flex URL
47923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47925 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47933 \begin_layout Bibliography
47934 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47935 LatexCommand bibitem
47941 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47944 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47948 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47950 \begin_inset Newline newline
47954 \begin_inset Flex URL
47957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47959 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47967 \begin_layout Bibliography
47968 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47969 LatexCommand bibitem
47975 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47978 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47982 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47984 \begin_inset Newline newline
47988 \begin_inset Flex URL
47991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47993 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
48001 \begin_layout Bibliography
48002 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48003 LatexCommand bibitem
48009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48012 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
48016 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48017 for Cyrillic languages:
48018 \begin_inset Newline newline
48022 \begin_inset Flex URL
48025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48027 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
48035 \begin_layout Bibliography
48036 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48037 LatexCommand bibitem
48043 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48046 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
48050 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48052 \begin_inset Newline newline
48056 \begin_inset Flex URL
48059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48061 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
48069 \begin_layout Bibliography
48070 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48071 LatexCommand bibitem
48077 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48080 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
48084 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48086 \begin_inset Newline newline
48090 \begin_inset Flex URL
48093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48095 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
48103 \begin_layout Bibliography
48104 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48105 LatexCommand bibitem
48111 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48114 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
48118 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48120 \begin_inset Newline newline
48124 \begin_inset Flex URL
48127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48129 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
48137 \begin_layout Bibliography
48138 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48139 LatexCommand bibitem
48145 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48148 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
48152 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48154 \begin_inset Newline newline
48158 \begin_inset Flex URL
48161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48163 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
48171 \begin_layout Bibliography
48172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48173 LatexCommand bibitem
48179 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48182 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
48186 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48188 \begin_inset Newline newline
48192 \begin_inset Flex URL
48195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48197 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
48205 \begin_layout Bibliography
48206 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48207 LatexCommand bibitem
48213 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48216 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
48220 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48222 \begin_inset Newline newline
48226 \begin_inset Flex URL
48229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48231 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
48239 \begin_layout Bibliography
48240 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48241 LatexCommand bibitem
48247 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48250 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
48254 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48256 \begin_inset Newline newline
48260 \begin_inset Flex URL
48263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48265 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
48273 \begin_layout Bibliography
48274 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48275 LatexCommand bibitem
48281 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48284 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
48288 about new features in
48294 \begin_inset Newline newline
48298 \begin_inset Flex URL
48301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48303 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
48311 \begin_layout Standard
48312 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48346 \begin_inset Note Note
48349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48356 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
48357 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
48358 bibliography is the second one:
48366 \begin_layout Standard
48367 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
48368 LatexCommand bibtex
48369 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
48370 options "biblio/alphadin"
48377 \begin_layout Standard
48378 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48382 \begin_layout Standard
48383 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
48384 LatexCommand printnomenclature
48390 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
48391 LatexCommand printindex